JP6432927B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Game machine Download PDF

Info

Publication number
JP6432927B2
JP6432927B2 JP2013188894A JP2013188894A JP6432927B2 JP 6432927 B2 JP6432927 B2 JP 6432927B2 JP 2013188894 A JP2013188894 A JP 2013188894A JP 2013188894 A JP2013188894 A JP 2013188894A JP 6432927 B2 JP6432927 B2 JP 6432927B2
Authority
JP
Japan
Prior art keywords
reel
game
combination
symbol
player
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Active
Application number
JP2013188894A
Other languages
Japanese (ja)
Other versions
JP2015054075A (en
Inventor
雅文 宮本
雅文 宮本
袖岡 隆
隆 袖岡
Original Assignee
株式会社ディ・ライト
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 株式会社ディ・ライト filed Critical 株式会社ディ・ライト
Priority to JP2013188894A priority Critical patent/JP6432927B2/en
Publication of JP2015054075A publication Critical patent/JP2015054075A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of JP6432927B2 publication Critical patent/JP6432927B2/en
Active legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a swivel type gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  Conventionally, a spinning-reel type game machine performs an internal lottery based on an operation by a player and rotates a reel with a plurality of types of symbols, and when a player performs an operation to stop the reel, It is known that when a reel is stopped based on a winning combination won by lottery and a symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed, a game medal as a privilege is paid out.

  Recently, in addition to the benefits by paying out game medals corresponding to the winning role, there is a gaming machine that can provide the player with additional benefits by controlling to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. It is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In this type of gaming machine, even if it is decided to give an additional privilege, there is a device that does not notify immediately but intentionally maintains the expectation for the additional privilege by notifying after a predetermined game period elapses. Has been made.

JP 2011-234952 A

  Conventionally, however, the above-mentioned predetermined game period can raise interest in whether or not an additional privilege is granted, while if an additional privilege is granted after the lapse of the predetermined game period, it is drawn in the meantime. There was a risk that the player would feel that the winning role was useless.

  Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can maintain a player's expectation in order to solve the above-described problems.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention is based on a plurality of movable bodies provided with a plurality of symbols, start operation means capable of rotating the plurality of movable bodies, and operation of the start operation means. A predetermined condition is established; a lottery means for performing a lottery on the winning combination; a game state control means for controlling at least one of the normal game state and an advantageous game state advantageous to the normal game state; A transition determining means for determining to shift to the advantageous gaming state at a different rate according to the type of the winning combination lottered by the lottery means during a predetermined game period to be transferred in the case of The game state control means is the predetermined game even if the transition determination means determines that the transition to the advantageous game state is made during the predetermined game period. During are those causes the control to the advantageous gaming state after completion, when the predetermined game period ends, the possible notification whether to transit to the advantageous gaming state to the player proceeds notification effect by the shift determination means The transition notification effect executing means for performing the game and the lottery means indicate that the specific winning combination has been drawn by lottery based on the fact that at least the specific winning combination is selected during the predetermined game period. Specific combination instruction means capable of displaying specific information, wherein the specific combination instruction means further displays the specific winning combination after the specific information is displayed until the predetermined game period ends. run the increased production which may increase the specific information based on which the lottery, the transition notification effect execution means, said by the increased effect until the predetermined game period ends When the fixed information is increased, the transition notification effect for the number of times including the increased specific information can be executed, and all the transition notification effects for the number of times including the increased specific information are executed. If the player is informed of the transition to the advantageous gaming state according to the result of the transition notification effect, the additional privilege effect that can give an additional privilege related to the advantageous gaming state to be transferred is left. The gaming machine is characterized by being executed a number of times according to specific information .

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can sustain the player's expectation.

It is a disassembled perspective view of a slot machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which omitted the door-shaped front member. It is a perspective view of a slot machine. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the slot machine which shows the state which abbreviate | omitted the door-shaped front member. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of a Z1 part in FIG. 4. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of a portion Z1 in FIG. 4 showing a state in which the connector holder is moved. It is a cross-sectional view of the slot machine showing a state in which the door-shaped front member is omitted. FIG. 8A is an enlarged view of a portion Z2 in FIG. 7, and FIG. 8B is an enlarged view of a portion Z2 in FIG. 7 showing a state where the connector holder is moved. It is an enlarged view which shows the principal part of Fig.8 (a). It is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the slot machine showing the back plate side. It is a disassembled perspective view of a case member. It is the perspective view which looked at the case member from back. (A), (b) is a perspective view of the principal part of a case member explaining the temporarily fixed state of a connector holder. It is a disassembled perspective view of a wiring relay member. It is the front view which abbreviate | omitted the cover body of the wiring relay member. It is a disassembled perspective view of a connector holder. It is a disassembled perspective view of a connector holder. It is a perspective view of the stopper which stops a case member. It is a perspective view of the stopper which shows another form. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the guide structure of a case member. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the guide structure of a case member. It is a fragmentary perspective view of the symbol variation display apparatus which shows the other form of a handle. It is a perspective view of the principal part which shows the relationship between a case member and the stopper of the outer main body side. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the relationship between a wiring window and the reel of a design variation display apparatus. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the upper part of the slot machine. FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing a lower half portion of the slot machine with the medal releasing device omitted. FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 26. It is the rear view which looked at the heat radiation opening from the back side of the slot machine. It is a partial cross-section partial front view of the slot machine showing the power supply device. It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked up at the power supply device from the bottom. It is a principal part sectional drawing of the side plate of an outer main part, and a power supply device which shows another form. It is a schematic sectional drawing of the illuminating device which shows another form. It is a perspective view of the door-shaped front member which disassembles and shows a transparent plate and a light emitting unit. It is a perspective view of the door-shaped front member which decomposes | disassembles and shows a transparent plate. FIG. 34 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 33A-A of the door-shaped front member equipped with a transparent plate. It is a disassembled / assembled perspective view of a hinge metal fitting. It is a diagram which shows the chain | linkage of a hinge metal fitting. It is a cross-sectional top view of the principal part which shows a door-shaped front member. It is a cross-sectional top view of the principal part which shows the door-shaped front member in the middle of opening. It is the perspective view seen from the back side which shows the upper half part of a door-shaped front member. It is the cross-sectional perspective view which cut | disconnected the coupling tool to the vertical direction. It is a principal part crossing top view of the door-shaped front member which shows the example of another hinge metal fitting. It is a cross-sectional plan view of the principal part which shows the middle of opening of the door-shaped front member of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the image display body and the frame member in the model unit. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the door-shaped front member, connecting a connector. FIG. 3 is a development view in which a symbol array of a reel band is developed in a plane. It is an enlarged view of the symbol display window 401 part. It is the schematic which shows roughly the structure of the various mechanism elements with which the slot machine is equipped, an electronic device, an operation member, etc. It is a correspondence table | surface which shows the combination aspect of the symbol corresponding to each winning combination, and its game privilege. It is a figure which shows each winning combination and the condition apparatus established corresponding to each winning combination. It is a figure which shows the combination of the symbol corresponding to each condition apparatus, and the number of payout of medals. It is a figure following FIG. 51, and is a figure which shows the combination of the symbol corresponding to each condition apparatus, and the number of payout of medals. It is a figure which continues from FIG. 52, and is a figure which shows the combination of the symbol corresponding to each condition apparatus, and the number of payout of medals. It is a flowchart which shows the basic 1 game processing procedure in the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a starting process. It is an extraction random number value hit value determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a reel stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a BB game start process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a BB game completion | finish determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a RB game start process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of RB game completion | finish determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of an ART game start process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of an ART game completion | finish determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process of a special game state. It is an example of a pattern setting / selection table for reel special effects. It is a reel special effect execution control table of patterns 1 to 3 of reel special effects. It is an execution control table of the pattern 4 of a reel special effect. It is a flowchart for performing the pattern 4 of a reel special effect. It is an example of the symbol combination displayed in a special game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the setting of the priority of a condition apparatus. It is a table | surface which shows an example of the command transmitted to a production | presentation control board from a main board | substrate. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a penalty process. It is a timing chart of the conventional freeze production. It is a timing chart of the freeze production of the present invention. It is a transition diagram of the reel symbol showing a specific example of the specific freeze effect. It is a lottery table of the freeze production pattern with respect to the stop symbol of the winning combination. This is a lottery table when the reels to be removably selected by the player are selected when the winning symbol stop symbol pattern is A, B, or C. It is a distribution table for determining the degree of additional privilege of freeze production. It is a figure explaining the simulation image of the front of the magazine of a rotary handgun. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination (non-specific combination correspondence) by a bell symbol. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination (corresponding to a specific combination) by a bell symbol. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination containing a common symbol arrangement | sequence.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings, taking a slot machine as a gaming machine as an example. 1 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine, FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine with the door-shaped front member omitted, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine, and FIG. 4 is a door-shaped front member omitted. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of the Z1 part of FIG. 4, FIG. 6 is an enlarged view of the Z1 part of FIG. 4 showing a state where the connector holder is moved, and FIG. FIG. 8A is an enlarged view of the Z2 portion of FIG. 7, and FIG. 8B is an enlarged view of the Z2 portion of FIG. 7 showing the state in which the connector holder is moved. 9 is an enlarged view showing the main part of FIG. 8A, FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the slot machine showing the back plate side, FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the case member, and FIG. FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b) show a temporarily fixed state of the connector holder. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the wiring relay member, FIG. 15 is a front view in which the cover of the wiring relay member is omitted, and FIGS. 16 and 17 are exploded perspective views of the connector holder. 18 is a perspective view of a stopper for stopping the case member, FIG. 19 is a perspective view of a stopper showing another embodiment, FIGS. 20 and 21 are cross-sectional views of the main part showing the guide structure of the case member, and FIG. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the main part showing the relationship between the case member and the stopper on the outer main body side, and FIG. 24 is the relationship between the wiring window and the reel of the symbol variation display apparatus. 25 is a longitudinal sectional view of the upper part of the slot machine, FIG. 26 is a perspective view showing the lower half of the slot machine with the medal releasing device omitted, and FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 28 is the back of the slot machine FIG. 29 is a partial sectional front view of the slot machine showing the power supply device, FIG. 30 is a perspective view showing the power supply device viewed from below, and FIG. 31 shows another embodiment. FIG. 32 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a lighting device showing another form, FIG. 33 is a perspective view of a door-shaped front member showing an exploded transparent plate and a light-emitting unit, 34 is an exploded perspective view of the door-shaped front member showing the transparent plate, FIG. 35 is a sectional view corresponding to FIG. 33A-A of the door-shaped front member fitted with the transparent plate, and FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the hinge bracket. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a chain of hinge fittings, FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the door-shaped front member, and FIG. 39 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the door-shaped front member in the middle of opening. 40 is a perspective view seen from the back side showing the upper half of the door-shaped front member, and FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional perspective view, FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part of the door-shaped front member showing an example of another hinge fitting, and FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the door-shaped front member shown in FIG. 44 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front opening / closing member is opened in the model unit, and FIG. 45 is a perspective view showing a state in which the door-shaped front member is opened while the coupler is connected.

[1. Slot machine]
As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the slot machine 1 of the present invention can be rotated in the shape of a side-opening door with a box-shaped outer body 100 whose front surface is open and a rotating shaft 100a on the front surface of the outer body 100. A door-shaped front member 200 attached to the housing, a symbol variation display device 300 that varies a plurality of symbols by a driving means, a case member 400 that is detachable from the outer body 100 and has an opening 401 on the front surface, and an optional And an image display 500 that displays the image of the above.

[2. Outer body]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the outer body 100 has side plates 102 and 102 attached to the left and right sides of the bottom plate 101, and a top plate 103 installed on the top of the side plates 102 and 102. It has a letter-shaped frame shape and is formed in a box shape in which only the front surface is opened by fixing a back plate 104 to the back of the frame. The left and right side plates 102, 102 have a trapezoidal shape in which the front edges are slightly inclined in a backward inclined state, and thus the opening of the outer body 100 has a backward inclined inclination. In addition, a plurality of (in the embodiment, in the embodiment) the top plate 103 is located in a region facing the upper pier 600 (see the imaginary line in FIG. 25) of the gaming machine installation island in a state of being installed on the gaming machine installation island (not shown). 4) through-holes 132 are formed.

[2-1. Outer body-partition plate]
In the outer main body 100, a shelf-like partition plate 105 is provided substantially at the center of the height. The partition plate 105 is made of metal and has a substantially convex shape in front view having a protruding portion 106 at the center as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, and vertical mounting pieces 107 formed at both ends are attached to the outer body 100. The side plate 102 is fixed to the inner surface of the side plate 102, and a vertical mounting piece 108 formed at the rear end is fixedly attached to the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. The mounting piece 108 at the rear end of the partition plate 105 is formed with a cylindrical projection (not shown) by burring (metal processing for raising a short cylindrical projection while expanding the hole diameter of the lower hole with a punch). The cylindrical protrusion is driven into a small hole (not shown) pre-processed in the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 and positioned. In addition, an opening 109 for wiring is formed between the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 in the innermost part on both sides of the partition plate 105.

[2-1-1. Outer body-partition plate-lower space]
In the space below the partition plate 105 in the outer main body 100, a medal releasing device 110 that releases a medal as a game medium to a medal tray 201 at the lower front of the door-shaped front member 200, and the medal releasing device 110 A medal auxiliary storage box 111 for storing overflowing medals, a power supply device 112, and the like are provided.

[2-1-1-1. Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Medal release device]
The medal releasing device 110 is obtained by attaching a medal storage hopper 110b to a device main body 110a having a built-in driving means. A medal discharge port 110c is provided on the front surface of the device main body 110a. A certain medal is sent out one by one toward the discharge port 110c by the operation of the driving means. The hopper 110b is provided with an overflow rod 110d for discharging overflowing medals, and the above-mentioned medal auxiliary storage box 111 faces below the protruding end of the overflow rod 110d. The medal releasing mechanism of the medal releasing device 110 may employ any currently known mechanism, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

[2-1-1-2. Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Power supply unit]
As shown in FIGS. 26 to 30, the power supply device 112 is attached to an inner corner portion in which three members of the bottom plate 101 of the outer main body 100, the left side plate 102 and the back plate 104 are orthogonal to each other. Yes. The power supply device 112 is a component for supplying electricity to the electrical components such as the medal discharge device 110 and is likely to generate heat. Therefore, the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 radiates heat to the attachment portion of the power supply device 112. A mouth 104a is opened.

  The device case 112a of the power supply device 112 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. By doing so, since the inside of the device case 112a can be seen, it is easy to find an unauthorized work on the substrate 112s (see FIG. 30) of the power supply device 112 and the like. The device case 112a includes an upper plate 112b that covers the upper surface, a rear plate 112c that faces the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100, a front plate 112d that covers the opposite side of the rear plate 112c, and an interior of the slot machine 1. It is formed by a side plate 112e that covers the facing side, a slope plate 112f that covers the boundary between the top plate 112b and the side plate 112e in a chamfered form, and a bottom plate 112r (see FIG. 30) that covers the bottom. On the other hand, the surface of the device case 112a that faces the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 is not covered and is in an open state, but this open surface is attached to the outer main body 100 by the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100. It is blocked.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the side plate 102 of the outer body 100 is provided with a convex surface portion 102a to form a stepped guard portion 102b, and the upper surface plate 112b of the device case 112a is provided below the guard portion 102b. It is a specification that sneaks one side. As a result, even if one surface of the device case 112a is not covered, the joint between the device case 112a and the side plate 102 is blocked by the guard portion 102b, so that foreign matter cannot be inserted. FIG. 31 shows another embodiment in which the guard portion 102b is formed in a groove shape. In this example, the edge of the upper surface plate 112b of the device case 112a slightly protrudes toward the side plate 102, and the tip of the guard portion 102b is formed. It fits into the groove.

  Thus, in the device case 112a of the power supply device 112, when the surface of the outer body 100 that is in contact with the side plate 102 has an open structure without a cover and is covered with the side plate 102 during use, the device case 112a is moved into the device case 112a. The substrate 112s and the like can be easily assembled using the open surface, and workability is improved because it is not necessary to attach a cover to the open surface after the substrate 112s and the like are assembled in the device case 112a.

  The upper surface plate 112b, the side surface plate 112e, the inclined surface plate 112f, the rear surface plate 112c, and the bottom surface plate 112r of the device case 112a are formed with a large number of air holes 112g, 112g. . The device case 112a is lifted in a raised manner by legs 112h, 112h... Provided at the bottom, and a ventilation space 112i is formed between the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a and the bottom plate 101 of the outer body 100. Therefore, low-rise and relatively cool air can be introduced into the device case 112a from the ventilation space 112i through the ventilation holes 112g, 112g,. Since the ventilation space 112i of the embodiment communicates with the heat radiating port 104a of the outer main body 100, cold air at the back of the machine can be introduced into the ventilation space 112i. If the inverted L-shaped step 112j (see FIG. 30) for raising the ventilation space 112i is formed at the boundary between the rear plate 112c and the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a, the height of the leg 112h and the heat radiation port 104a are formed. Even if there is a deviation in the height, the ventilation space 112i can be communicated with the heat radiation port 104a.

[2-1-1-2-1. Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Power supply-Fixed]
The power supply device 112 includes an attachment piece 112k that is perpendicular to one side of the front plate 112d of the device case 112a, and a protrusion that protrudes from the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a toward the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. 112 m and the heat radiating port 104 a opened in the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 are fixed to the outer main body 100.

  That is, the contour of the heat radiating port 104a is formed smaller than the contour of the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a, so that the power supply device 112 hits the back plate 104 of the outer body 100 and does not pass through the heat radiating port 104a. The protrusion 112m protruding from the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a is in a position inscribed in the heat radiating port 104a, and is a horizontal protrusion inscribed in the upper side of the radiating port 104a to resist the lifting operation of the power supply device 112. It consists of a piece 112m-1 and a vertical protrusion 112m-2 inscribed in the vertical side of the heat radiating port 104a in order to resist the rollover operation of the power supply device 112. Therefore, the power supply device 112 is pushed along the inner surface of the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100, and the protrusion 112m is inserted into the heat radiating port 104a. Fixing in the right direction (rollover) is completed. Of course, the movement of the power supply device 112 is regulated by the bottom plate 101 of the outer main body 100 in the downward direction and by the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 in the left direction in FIG. The movement of the power supply device 112 can be completely restricted with respect to directions other than the direction of pulling forward by a simple operation of only fitting the protrusion 112m.

  On the other hand, a plurality of screw through holes 112p are formed in the mounting piece 112k projecting from the front plate 112d, and are fixed to the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 through wood screws 112q in at least one of the through holes 112p. Thus, since the movement of the power supply device 112 is also restricted in the direction of pulling forward, the power supply device 112 can be reliably fixed to the outer main body 100 with one wood screw 112q.

[2-1-1-2-2. Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Power supply-Power cord]
A power cord (not shown) for receiving power from the outside is connected to the power supply device 112. Conventionally, a bulging portion is provided on the side of the heat radiating port 104a and the power cord is pulled out from the bulging portion. However, at this position, there is a high risk that the power cord is bundled with the ground. The slot machine 1 may be turned on during manufacturing, and a power cord must be taken out of the outer main body 100 in preparation for the case. Therefore, the slot machine 1 is moved on the manufacturing line or between lines. When moving the power cord, the power cord may slip on the ground or get caught under the bottom plate 101 of the slot machine 1.

  On the other hand, the heat radiation port 104a of the embodiment expands the cord outlet 104b from the upper side toward the upper side, and draws the power cord from there. This ensures a sufficient height for hanging the bundled power cords in a suspended state. Therefore, the trouble of accidentally damaging the power cord in the process of manufacturing the slot machine 1 is drastically reduced.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present invention, since the power supply device 112 is set at the inner corner portion of the outer main body 100 and only one wood screw 112q is screwed in, the mounting is completed. Great labor saving in installation work. Further, in the present invention, fixing is completed by screwing to one surface, and therefore, particularly when the portion to be fixed is brought to the front (front side) of the power supply device 112, it is easy to see and can be fixed securely. . Incidentally, conventionally, it is necessary to screw with respect to a plurality of surfaces or members of the power supply device 112. In particular, a screw fixed to the back plate 104 is difficult to visually recognize and may be forgotten.

  Further, since the heat radiating port 104a is necessary as a cooling means for the power supply device 112, even if the heat radiating port 104a is used for fixing the power supply device 112, an extra process and cost hardly occur. On the contrary, the cooling efficiency is improved because the position of the heat radiating port 104a and the position of the power supply device 112 are matched for fixing. In addition, when the device case 112a is made of a synthetic resin as in the embodiment, the mounting projection 112m can be integrally formed, so that it costs little. Therefore, the total cost required for mounting the power supply device 112 can be reduced as compared with the conventional case.

  Furthermore, when the device case 112a is made of a synthetic resin, there is an advantage that the leg portion 112h and the step portion 112j of the device case 112a useful as a measure against heat generation of the power supply device 112 can be implemented with almost no cost.

[2-1-2. Outer body-partition plate-upper space]
On the other hand, the case member 400 is housed in a space above the partition plate 105 in the outer main body 100, and a wiring relay member 113 serving as the core of the wiring means described later is provided on the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. The back plate 104 is further provided with a vent hole 133 for heat dissipation above the wiring relay member 113.

[3. Door-shaped front member]
3 shows the front side of the door-shaped front member 200, and FIG. 1 shows the back side of the door-shaped front member 200. The door-shaped front member 200 has a medal tray 201 on the lower side on the front side, and an operation unit 202 is provided in the approximate center on the front side. The operation unit 202 includes a medal insertion slot 203, and a one-sheet insertion button 205 for instructing insertion (withdrawal) of only one medal stored as data in a memory of a main board 409 described later. Similarly, a MAX insertion button 206 for instructing insertion of the maximum number (for example, three) that can be used in one game, and a medal return for returning a medal packed in a medal selector 207 to be described later to the medal tray 201. A button 208, a storage release switch 209 for inputting a storage release command (release command by settlement) of medal stored as data in the memory of the main board 409, and a start lever 210 for operating the symbol variation display device 300 And three reel stops for stopping the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300. Button 211a, 211b, 211c and the like are provided. Of course, the configuration of the operation unit 202 shown here is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited thereto. The start lever 210 corresponds to the start operation unit described in the solving means. The three reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c correspond to a plurality of stop operation units described in the solving means.

  In addition, a medal selector 207 is provided on the back side of the insertion slot 203, and a medal basket 212 is connected to the side of the medal selector 207 and a return basket 213 is connected to the bottom. The medal selector 207 is a well-known one that switches the flow path by turning on and off a built-in solenoid (not shown), and when the game state is waiting for the player to insert a medal, the flow path is set to the medal tub 212 side. In addition, in a gaming state in which medals are refused to be inserted, such as medals exceeding the prescribed number, the flow path is set to the return basket 213 side. When the door-shaped front member 200 is in a closed position where the door-shaped front member 200 covers the front surface of the outer main body 100, the tip of the medal basket 212 faces the hopper 110 b of the medal discharge device 110. The medal that flows through the medal bowl 212 through the hop-off reaches the hopper 110b. On the other hand, the return basket 213 is connected to the front-side medal tray 201, and the medal that flows from the insertion slot 203 through the medal selector 207 to the return basket 213 returns to the medal tray 201.

[3-1. Door-shaped front member-perspective window]
The door-shaped front member 200 is sized to cover the entire front surface of the outer main body 100, and the upper half of the door-shaped front member 200 is a see-through window for games covered with a transparent plate 214a as shown in FIGS. 214. The see-through window 214 and the transparent plate 214a of the embodiment are larger than usual so that the image display body 500 and the design variation display device 300 can be seen side by side, and the image is formed by the forehead frame 216 integrated with the door-shaped front member 200. The regions of the display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 are visually divided vertically. In this way, if one transparent plate 214a is set to a size that covers both the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300, the arrangement of the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 is switched up and down. However, it can be used as it is.

[3-1-1. Door-shaped front member-see-through window-transparent plate]
The transparent plate 214a uses a transparent synthetic resin (for example, methacrylic resin containing rubber excellent in impact resistance, scratch resistance, and optical properties, and in the embodiment, “Acrypet (registered trademark) IR D30” manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd. is used. ) In a generally inverted trapezoidal shape, and an edge member 214b that bulges to the front side of the three sides (left and right sides and upper side) excluding the bottom, with the side facing the player as the front 214b and 214b are integrally molded at the time of resin molding using a mold for resin molding. When the edge member 214b is integrally formed on the periphery of the flat plate-like transparent plate 214a as described above, the edge member 214b serves as a reinforcing bar to increase the strength of the entire transparent plate 214a. As described above, even if it is large enough to cover both the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300, bending and distortion hardly occur.

  As shown in FIG. 35, the edge member 214b is a shell structure that opens to the rear surface side (not a solid, but a shell-like structure with a space inside, and the thickness of each part is arbitrary). The light emitting unit 217 and, for example, a decorative member (not shown) having a pattern or characters on the surface are incorporated in the internal space as necessary.

  In FIG. 34, the light emitting unit 217 is depicted as being attached to the door-shaped front member 200, but the actual light emitting unit 217 is fitted into the edge member 214b as shown in FIG. ing. Therefore, the transparent plate 214a and the light emitting unit 217 are handled as an integral part.

  The shape of the edge member 214b is not limited to that shown in the figure, and can be arbitrarily changed according to the design of the light emitting unit 217 and the decorative member. Further, the portion where the edge member 214b is provided is not limited to the three sides of the periphery of the transparent plate 214a as in the embodiment, and may be provided on any one side at a minimum.

  In addition, in FIGS. 33 and 34, reference numeral 218 denotes a fixing member provided at the left and right corners on the transparent plate 214a. The screw is passed through the through hole 214c (see FIG. 33 enlarged view) from the back side of the transparent plate 214a. (Not shown), it is stopped in the state of FIG. 34 fitted between the edge member 214b and the edge member 214b. The fixing member 218 functions as a corner decoration on the appearance, and on the through holes 200a and 214d (see an enlarged view of FIG. 33) provided at the corner portions on the door-shaped front member 200 and the transparent plate 214a. It is screwed into a screw (not shown) passed from the back side of the door-shaped front member 200, thereby serving as a nut for fixing the transparent plate 214a to the door-shaped front member 200.

  33 to 35, reference numeral 217a denotes a light emitter of the light emitting unit 217, and 217b denotes a reflecting member that supports the light emitter 217a. As shown in FIG. 35, the reflection member 217b of the light emitting unit 217 located on the left and right is set at an angle so as to reflect a large amount of light from the rod-shaped light emitter 217a toward the periphery of the slot machine 1. In the form in which the light emitting unit 217 is incorporated inside the edge member 214b of the transparent plate 214a, the light emitter 217a can be arranged on the front side of the slot machine 1, so that it looks like a lighthouse at the tip of the cape. This is advantageous when light is emitted toward the surroundings. In addition, the reflecting member 217b of the light emitting unit 217 located above is set so as to reflect a large amount of light from the light emitter 217a (a combination of the light source 217a-1 and the light guide plate 217a-2) upward of the slot machine 1. ing.

  The light-emitting unit 217 having the above-described structure can be turned on during a game, particularly when a big hit occurs, and can produce an effect that appeals to the surroundings of the occurrence of the big hit. In this way, by performing an effect with a high degree of appeal to the surroundings, it is possible to draw attention to the player who has won a big hit, and the line of sight of many people gives the player a sense of superiority, which further increases the game. In addition, it is expected that the popularity of the model will increase and the operating rate will improve by appealing to the public that the big hit has been made.

  The transparent plate 214a of the embodiment has the above-described configuration, and the bottom of the plate-shaped front member 200 is formed with respect to the concave groove 219 (see an enlarged view of FIG. 34) provided on the back side of the door-shaped front member 200. Inserted obliquely from the front and fitted into a joiner type, in that state the transparent plate 214a is erected to bring all the edge members 214b, 214b, 214b into contact with the front surface of the door-shaped front member 200, and further the door-shaped front member 200 It fixes with the screw | thread 603 (refer FIG. 1) passed from the back. FIG. 35 is a cut view of the main part of the door-shaped front member 200 at this time. As is apparent from FIG. 35, if the player has a foreign object from the boundary between the door-shaped front member 200 and the edge member 214b. Even if it is forcibly inserted, there is little room for the tip of the foreign material to cross the inside of the edge member 214b and reach the back side of the transparent plate 214a. Therefore, it exhibits an excellent crime prevention effect.

[3-2. Door-shaped front member-lock device]
A lock device 215 that opens and closes using a dedicated key (not shown) is provided on one side of the free end side of the door-shaped front member 200.

[4. Design variation display device]
The symbol variation display device 300 is a reel rotation type display device, and incorporates and accommodates, for example, three reels 301a, 301b, and 301c that can be individually rotated by driving means 303 such as a motor, and the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. And a device case 302 that plays a game with a combination of a plurality of symbols (not shown) drawn on the peripheral surfaces of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c.

  The device case 302 has a deformed hexagonal column shape excluding three faces from the octagonal column that lies on its side to the front (player), and includes a bottom plate 304, a top plate 305, and a right side in FIG. Right side plate 306, left side plate 307 on the left side, vertical rear plate 308 covering the rear surface, upper swash plate 309 provided between the top plate portion 305 and the rear plate 308, bottom plate 304 and rear plate 308. And a part of the arc of the reels 301 a, 301 b, and 301 c protrudes from the front of the device case 302.

  In addition, the top plate portion 305 of the device case 302 is provided with a handle 311 that can be changed between a useable state in which a finger can be hooked and a non-use state in which the top plate portion 305 is depressed. To carry.

  The configuration in which the changeable handle 311 is provided on the top plate portion 305 of the apparatus case 302 as described above is closely related to a measure for increasing the strength of the case member 400. That is, in the embodiment, as will be described later, a reinforcing bar 402 is provided in the opening 401 of the case member 400 to give the opening 401 of the case member 400 sufficient strength to allow the image display body 500 to be cantilevered. Since such a reinforcing bar 402 crosses the opening 401, it clearly becomes an obstacle to the insertion and removal of the apparatus case 302 into and from the case member 400. On the other hand, if the handle 311 can be changed and hung on the top plate portion 305 as in the embodiment, the protrusion of the handle 311 is eliminated, so that the device case 302 can pass under the reinforcing bar 402 without difficulty. Accordingly, it is possible to provide the reinforcing bar 402 in the direction crossing the opening 401 at the opening 401 of the case member 400 only by providing the handle 311 that can be changed as described above on the top plate 305 of the device case 302. Become. Incidentally, the conventional apparatus case has a room for providing a reinforcing bar at the opening of the case member because the handle protrudes from the top plate and becomes an obstacle.

  In addition, the handle 311 of the embodiment is configured to swing and change between the standing use state and the lying down non-use state, but the structure that can change the handle 311 between the use state and the non-use state is implemented. The form is not limited. For example, as shown in FIG. 22, two belt loops 314, 314 are cut and raised on the top plate 305, and the belt loops 314, 314 are made of, for example, synthetic resin or leather, and stoppers 315, 315 are provided at both ends. A useable state in which fingers can be hooked, such as a structure in which the band-shaped handle 311 provided is inserted and the center is pulled up to change to a usable state in which fingers can be hooked from the obstructed non-use state of FIG. Any structure may be used as long as it can be changed to the unused state.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 11, a flange-like lower handle 316 protrudes from the bottom plate 304 of the device case 302 of the embodiment, and the device case 302 is pushed in by grasping the lower handle 316. By pulling, it is easy to put in and out the case member 400.

[5. Case material]
The case member 400 has a size substantially matching the space above the partition plate 105 of the outer main body 100, and includes a bottom plate 403, side plates 404 and 404 erected on both the left and right sides of the bottom plate 403, and a bottom plate 403. The rear plate 405 is erected on the rear edge of the rear plate 405, and the top plate 406 covers the upper surface of the rear plate 405 and the side plates 404, 404.

  In the case member 400, the bottom plate 403 is made of metal, the side plates 404, 404, the rear plate 405, and the top plate 406 are made of synthetic resin, and the side plate 404, 404 and the inner surface of the opening 401 of the top plate 406 are made of metal reinforcement. Members 407, 407, and 407 are provided, and a metal reinforcing bar 402 across the opening 401 is stretched between the reinforcing members 407 and 407 of the side plates 404 and 404. The area below the reinforcing bar 402 is the installation area for the symbol variation display device 300, and the opening 401 above the reinforcing bar 402 is the installation area for the image display body 500. An area surrounded by the case member 400 behind the display body 500 is allocated as a wiring work space 408, and a main board 409 as a main control board is mounted on the inner wall surface of the rear plate 405 of the wiring work space 408, and A control board other than the main board 409 (eg, an effect control board 510 (see FIG. 44)) is also mounted in the wiring work space 408.

  The top plate 406 of the case member 400 is formed with skylight portions 443 and 443 as shown in FIG. The skylight portions 443 and 443 are divided into two with a reinforcing band 444 for maintaining the strength of the top plate 406 interposed therebetween, each of which has an axis line passing through the through holes 132, 132. It exists in the area | region containing an intersection, and is opened sufficiently widely than this through-hole 132,132 .... However, the peripheral edge on the front side of the skylight portion 443 is close to the through hole 132 located on the front side. By doing so, since the through hole 132 can be found by searching with the periphery of the skylight portion 443 as a reference, the position of the through hole 132 can be quickly and easily determined even if the operator does not look into the skylight portion 443. Here, the skylight 443 also functions as the opening of the present invention. That is, by providing a plurality of skylight portions 443 as openings on the upper surface of the case member 400, the weight can be reduced, and the burden on the operator during transportation or replacement can be further reduced.

  As shown in FIGS. 2, 5, 6, and 12, a plurality of bosses 410, 410 project from the outer surface of the rear plate 405 of the case member 400, and the bosses 410 serve as the back plate of the outer body 100. The boss holes 114 and 114 pre-processed in 104 are fitted and positioned. 2 and 5, the bosses 410 and 410 are provided near a wiring window 411, which will be described later. On the other hand, the boss holes 114 and 114 on the outer body 100 side are close to the wiring relay member 113. Accordingly, the positioning of the wiring window 411 of the case member 400 and the wiring relay member 113 of the back plate 104 becomes accurate.

  On the other hand, a concave step portion 412 is formed on the bottom surface of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400 as shown in FIG. 2, and the concave step portion 412 fits into the protruding step portion 106 of the partition plate 105. A tapered portion 413 extending in the rearward direction is provided at the end on the rear plate 405 side of the recessed step portion 412, and is guided by the tapered portion 413 and the protruding step portion 106 of the partition plate 105 and the case member 400. The concave step 412 can be smoothly fitted. Thus, the case member 400 is straightly guided to the back of the partition plate 105 by the fitting of the concave step portion 412 of the case member 400 and the protruding step portion 106 of the partition plate 105. For example, as shown in FIG. A rail member 115 in the form of a concave groove is laid on the plate 105 or press-molded integrally. On the other hand, a wheel 414 is installed on the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400, and the wheel 414 is rolled in the groove of the rail member 115. Also good. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 21, a rail member 116 having a convex shape is laid or integrally formed on the partition plate 105, and on the other hand, flanges 415 and 415 are formed on both ends of the wheel 414 of the case member 400, The rail member 116 may be sandwiched between the flanges 415 and 415 of the wheel 414.

  Further, the case member 400 is stopped by a swing lever-shaped stopper 117 shown in FIGS. 1, 2, 18, and 23 while being set at a predetermined position on the partition plate 105. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the stopper 117 is pivotally attached to the front end of the partition plate 105 and the two attachments 118 and 118 suspended from the top plate 103, as shown by the solid line in FIG. The operation posture engaged with a part of the case member 400 and the non-operation posture not engaged with the case member 400 as indicated by an imaginary line in FIG. Regulate movement. If the stopper 117 is key-shaped as shown in FIG. 19 and engaged with the hooking portion 416 provided on the case member 400, the upward movement of the case member 400 on the partition plate 105 is also restricted. be able to.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 23, the stopper 117 pivotally attached to the fixture 118 of the top plate 103 is at a position facing a locking hole 442 penetrating the corner portion of the side plate 404 and the top plate 406 of the case member 400. The operation posture and the non-operation posture can be switched from the inside of the case member 400 while the case member 400 is pushed into a predetermined position.

  In addition, a wiring window 411 in the form of a long hole penetrating to the back plate 104 side of the outer main body 100 is opened on the rear plate 405 of the case member 400. The wiring window 411 corresponds to the upper swash plate 309 of the device case 302 of the symbol variation display device 300 installed on the case member 400 as shown in FIGS. The horizontal empty space 417 above the upper swash plate 309 (or a horizontal triangular space 417 formed between the upper swash plate 309 and the main board 409) and the back. It functions as an opening connecting the plates 104.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 12, the case member 400 is provided with a shelf-like temporary fixing member 418 (hereinafter also referred to as “temporary fixing shelf”) at a substantially intermediate position of the height of the empty space 417. In addition, recesses 419 and 419 are formed on the outside of the rear plate 405 and on both sides of the wiring window 411, which are wiring passages that pass through the left and right side surfaces of the case member 400.

  If the layout of the wiring window 411 is specified with reference to the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c of the symbol variation display device 300, the wiring window 411 has the reel 301a of the symbol variation display device 300 as shown in FIG. , 301b, 301c and the horizontal plane HH passing through the highest height position of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c as a lower limit, that is, the height at which the lower side is placed within the range. In other words, it is an arrangement.

[6. Image display]
The image display body 500 is a panel-type unit that can display an image, for example, which includes at least a liquid crystal display (or may be a plasma display or an organic EL display). It also functions as a front opening / closing member 90 (see FIG. 44). Note that the image display body 500 is attached to a reinforcing member 407 provided on the left side plate 404 of the case member 400 in FIG. 11 (see the shaded portion in FIG. 11 for the attachment position), and is rotated by the hinge fitting 420. It is supported freely.

  As shown in FIG. 44, an effect control board 510 is assembled on the back side of the image display body 500. For this reason, the image display body 500 such as a liquid crystal display and the effect control board 510 can be integrally configured, the handling becomes easy, and the wiring connecting the two can be omitted, and the wiring in the case member 400 can be omitted. The complexity of the work space 408 can be suppressed. Further, when the image display body 500 is opened, the effect control board 510 appears so as to jump out of the case member 400, so that the workability for the effect control board 510 can be remarkably improved.

[6-1. Image display-Hinge bracket]
FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the hinge fitting 420. FIG. In addition, since the hinge metal fitting 420 has a symmetrical structure, the upper part will be mainly described. The hinge fitting 420 is fixed to the fixing member 420a attached to the reinforcing member 407 of the case member 400, the rotating member 420b attached to the back side of the image display body 500 (see the broken line area 500s in FIG. 36), and the rotating member 420b. It comprises a short link 420c and a long link 420d that connect the members 420a.

  The fixing member 420a of the hinge bracket 420 has a horizontal fixing piece 420e in the form of a shelf plate. One end of a long link 420d is connected to the upper surface of the fixing piece 420e by a pin P1, and a short link is connected to the lower surface of the fixing piece 420e. One end of 420c is pivotally attached by a pin P2. On the other hand, the rotating member 420b of the hinge bracket 420 has a horizontal bearing piece 420f in the form of a shelf plate. One end of the long link 420d is formed on the upper surface of the bearing piece 420f with a pin P3, and the lower surface of the bearing piece 420f. In addition, one end of the short link 420c is pivotally attached by a pin P4.

  Thus, the fixed piece 420e, the bearing piece 420f, the long link 420d, the short link 420c, and the pins P1 to P4 constitute a four-bar rotation chain as shown in the diagram of FIG. A so-called double lever mechanism is formed in which a fixed piece 420e facing a certain bearing piece 420f is a fixed link. As shown in FIGS. 37A to 37C, both the lever mechanisms approximate the rotation trajectory of the image display body 500 to the rotation trajectory centering on the rotation shaft 100 a of the door-shaped front member 200. Therefore, each pin position is set. That is, the hinge bracket 420 functions as a rotation center moving mechanism, and even if the rotation position of the door-shaped front member 200 changes, the rotation outer edge side of the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 are not rotated. The distance from the edge side is made substantially constant.

  The long link 420d and the short link 420c have overlapping regions 420g and 420h that overlap vertically when the image display body 500 is rotated (opened) by approximately 90 degrees (for example, the overlapping of the long link 420d). The region 420g is expanded in a triangle so as to overlap the overlapping region 420h of the short link 420c.), And pin holes 420i and 420j are formed in the overlapping regions 420g and 420h, respectively. The pin holes 420i and 420j are aligned on the same axis and inserted into a rod-shaped stop pin (not shown) to connect the long link 420d and the short link 420c, thereby locking the lever mechanism and locking the image display body. It is for fixing 500 to an open position.

[6-2. Image display-Lock piece]
As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the vertical reinforcing member 407 of the case member 400 is locked to the reinforcing member 407 on the opposite side of the reinforcing member 407 provided with the hinge fitting 420 (on the right side in FIG. 11). A piece 421 is pivotally attached. When the lock piece 421 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 11, the tip of the lock piece 421 is engaged with a receiving portion 508 projecting from the back side of the image display body 500. The image display body 500 is locked at a position where the upper portion of the opening 401 of the case member 400 is closed. On the other hand, when the lock piece 421 is rotated in the reverse direction from the locked state, the lock of the image display body 500 is released, and the lock piece 421 is rotatable about the hinge fitting 420. Normally, before the case member 400 is attached to the outer main body 100, the image display body 500 is locked in the closed position to prevent unnecessary rotation, while in the state where the case member 400 is attached to the outer main body 100, the image is displayed. The display body 500 is unlocked to be rotatable.

[6-3. Image display body-connector]
By the way, since the image display body 500 which can be opened and closed is provided in the case member 400 separately from the door-shaped front member 200 of the outer main body 100, when the inside of the case member 400 is visually recognized or the case member 400 is operated. In this case, the door-shaped front member 200 on the near side must be opened first, and then the image display body 500 on the far side must be opened, which may reduce workability and annoyance. .

  Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present example, the rotation direction of the image display body 500 is set to the same direction as the rotation direction of the door-shaped front member 200, and the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 are appropriately connected. 700 is connected, and the image display body 500 is also opened and closed together with the opening and closing of the door-shaped front member 200. According to this, when the door-shaped front member 200 is opened, the image display body 500 is also rotated in the same direction via the connector 700, and the front surface of the case member 400 is opened. In other words, the image display body 500 is rotated around the door-shaped front member 200, and not only the inside of the outer main body 100 but also the inside of the case member 400 can be visually recognized by a single lateral opening operation.

  Here, as described above, the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 according to the embodiment are configured such that the pivot locus of the image display body 500 is the rotation axis 100a of the door-shaped front member 200 by the lever mechanism of the hinge fitting 420. However, there is still a relative shift between the movements of the two. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the coupling tool 700 of the embodiment forms a fixed sheath member 701 on the back surface on the free end side of the image display body 500, and slides inside the fixed sheath member 701. The rod 702 is accommodated in a free state, and the tip of the rod 702 is connected to the back surface of the door-shaped front member 200 (specifically, the base member 215a of the lock device 215) so as to be rotatable by a stop shaft 703. is there. By doing so, as shown in FIG. 39, the image display body 500 opens and closes together as if it is an accessory part of the door-shaped front member 200 in conjunction with the opening and closing of the door-shaped front member 200. The rod 702 of the connector 700 enters and exits the fixed sheath member 701 to absorb the relative shift in movement.

  Note that the maximum protrusion length when the rod 702 protrudes most from the rotation outer edge (free end) of the image display body 500 is when the image display body 500 is in the open position (for example, when it is opened 90 °). It is set based on the distance between the rotating outer edge of the door-shaped front member 200 (position of the stop shaft 703) and the rotating outer edge of the image display body 500. For this reason, the length of the rod 702 can be set to the minimum necessary length, and the increase in size of the coupler can be suppressed.

  The retaining shaft 703 is attached to support pieces 215b, 215b, and 215b formed by bending a part of the base member 215a of the lock device 215 so as to be movable up and down, and is always urged downward by a spring 703a. Has been. Therefore, the stop shaft 703 can be moved up against the urging force of the spring 703a, and the rod 702 of the connector 700 can be attached and detached by moving up and floating the lower end. That is, the stop shaft 703 can be inserted from above into the shaft hole portion 702a formed at the tip portion of the rod 702, and can be held by the biasing force of the spring 703a.

  In FIG. 40, reference numeral 704 denotes an elastic cantilever type stopper provided on the upper surface of the fixed sheath member 701 of the connector 700, and the rod 702 removed from the stop shaft 703 is attached to the fixed sheath member 701. The rod 702 is held inside, and is engaged with a hook wall 702b at the end of a groove 705 formed on the upper surface of the rod 702 to prevent the rod 702 from blinding. On the side of the rod 702, a knob 706 is projected in a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction. The stopper 704 is unlocked by picking the knob 706 and forcibly moving the rod 702. It is like that. Further, a retaining prevention piece 701 a is suspended from the bottom surface on the front end side of the fixed sheath member 701 and is inserted into the groove 705 of the rod 702. The retaining prevention piece 701 a is in contact with the hooking wall 702 b when the rod 702 protrudes the most, and prevents the rod 702 from coming out of the fixed sheath member 701.

  In FIG. 40, reference numeral 509 in the vicinity of the connector 700 is an engaging portion protruding from the back surface of the image display body 500 on the rotating outer edge side. The engaging portion 509 is engaged with the reinforcing bar 402 that traverses the opening 401 of the case member 400 to support the load on the free end side of the image display body 500 in the closed position. As shown in FIG. 11, the reinforcing bar 402 has a slide-type guide part 402 a inclined downward toward the image display body 500 in order to smoothly guide the engaging portion 509 to the upper surface of the reinforcing bar 402. It is provided. Further, the engaging portion 509 of the image display body 500 is formed of a synthetic resin having excellent lubricity different from that of the image display body 500, and is detachably attached to the image display body 500. Yes.

  By the way, the relative displacement of the movement due to the difference in the rotation trajectory between the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 is not limited to the above-described telescopic rod-type connector 700 but also a flexible wire. Can also be absorbed. However, if the connecting tool is a flexible wire or the like, the door-shaped front member 200 will be bumped against the image display body 500 that is stopped while the door-shaped front member 200 is closed, thereby impairing smoothness. There is a fear. On the other hand, for example, an urging means such as a winding spring may be provided on the image display body 500 so as to constantly urge it in the closing direction. By doing so, when the door-shaped front member 200 is closed, the image display body 500 is closed by itself while pulling the coupling tool by the action of the urging force, so that the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 do not collide. Of course, the means for rotating the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 is not limited to the above. For example, the hinge bracket 420, which is an element for rotation in the above, is not limited to the structure of the both lever mechanisms as described above, but is centered on a single pin 420k as shown in FIGS. A simple one that rotates the image display 500 may be used.

  Locking means for locking the image display body 500 in the closed position as described above, in which the image display body 500 is attached to the case member 400 with a hinge structure so that the image display body 500 can be rotated like a door. When the above-mentioned lock piece 421) is added, the lock is continued in principle with the case member 400 mounted on the outer main body 100, and the lock is released only when necessary, such as checking in the wiring work space 408. It is also possible to select the handling, and in that case, since the important parts (for example, the main board 409 and the production control board 510) in the wiring work space 408 can be blocked by the image display body 500, it is effective in improving the crime prevention performance. is there.

  A gap 10 is provided between the upper edge of the opening 401 of the case member 400 and the upper edge of the closed image display body 500, and the reinforcing member 407 of the top plate 406 is attached by a finger passing through the gap 10. It can be grasped. Further, a handle opening 422 is formed in the front center portion of the top plate 406 of the case member 400 (the reinforcing band 444 between the skylight portions 443 and 443), and a finger passing through the handle opening 422 is used to attach the top plate 406 to the top plate 406. The reinforcing member 407 can be gripped. Therefore, the case member 400 can be properly used for the handle 422 and the gap 10 in accordance with the place and posture of handling. For example, when the case member 400 is transported before being incorporated into the outer main body 100, it is better to carry it in a bowl shape using the handle port 422. On the other hand, the case member 400 mounted on the outer main body 100 is shown in FIG. As described above, the grip port 422 is hidden behind the outer body 100 so that a finger does not enter, so that the case member 400 is pulled out by placing the finger on the reinforcing member 407 from the gap 10. The lower handle 316 (see FIGS. 4 and 11) of the device case 302 protrudes from the front center of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400, and the outer body 100 is pushed or pulled by holding the lower handle 316. The case member 400 can be easily taken in and out of the case. In this case, the lower handle 316 is integrated with the case member 400 because the device case 302 is fixed to the case member 400 with screws. Therefore, the lower handle 316 protrudes in front of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400. Is equal to

[6-4. Image display body-frame member]
The image display body 500 has a size that covers almost the entire region above the reinforcing bar 402 of the opening 401 of the case member 400. In addition, a frame member 501 that surrounds a region below the reinforcing bar 402 of the opening 401 of the case member 400, that is, a front region of the symbol variation display device 300 in a frame shape, is integrally formed below the image display body 500. The reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 are bordered by the frame member 501. The surface of the frame member 501 is a decorative surface, on which an appropriate pattern is drawn. Although not shown, the frame member 501 is an electric decoration composed of a light emission source such as an LED, a light emission control board that controls the light emission source, and a decorative member that is disposed in front of the light emission source and can transmit light. Is provided. Here, what combined the image display body 500 and the frame member 501 is demonstrated as the front opening / closing member 90 (refer FIG. 44) below.

[6-4-1. Image Display Body-Frame Member-Lighting Device]
A lighting device 502 is provided on the upper and lower sides of the frame member 501, and the design of the symbol variation display device 300 is illuminated brightly by the lighting device 502. Since the frame member 501 is suspended below the image display body 500 and is close to the symbol variation display device 300, it is possible to bring the light source closer to the symbol variation display device 300 by incorporating the illumination device 502 into such a frame member 501. it can. Therefore, the means for incorporating the lighting device 502 into the frame member 501 has a feature that sufficient brightness can be ensured even with a low amount of light compared to the conventional lighting device.

  As illustrated in FIG. 4, the illumination device 502 illustrated as an embodiment has a strip-like substrate that is elongated in a direction perpendicular to the paper surface of the drawing (in the width direction of the slot machine 1 and in the same direction as the rotation axis of the reel 301 a...). A large number of light emitting diodes (hereinafter referred to as LEDs) 504 are arranged in a row 503, and the lower lighting device 502 includes an LED 504 in a tube frame 506 whose upper surface is closed with, for example, a milky white translucent cover plate 505. On the other hand, the upper illuminating device 502 is formed by disposing the LED 504 downward in a translucent cover 507 having a U-shaped cross section upward, for example, milky white.

  Note that the upper lighting device 502 is installed obliquely downward with the lighting direction from directly below to the player side, that is, the transparent plate 214a side, as shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the direction of the LED mounting surface of the substrate 503 is set so that the center line L (see the enlarged view of FIG. 4) of the main irradiation region of the LED 504 having relatively strong directivity is inclined with respect to the transparent plate 214a. It is inclined obliquely downward toward the transparent plate 214a side.

  Also, if a rod-like light emitter such as a fluorescent lamp is used as the light source of the lighting device 502, the substrate 503 in FIG. 4 is changed to a plate-like or concave reflecting member that wraps the light source, and direct light and What is necessary is just to set so that the centerline of the main irradiation area directed by the sum total of reflected light may strike the back surface on the transparent plate 214a side. As described above, when the irradiation aim of the illumination device 502 is set to the transparent plate 214a, even if a part of the leaked light illuminates the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, there is almost no influence.

  According to experiments, when the illumination direction of the illumination device 502 is directed to the peripheral surface side of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, specific portions of the curved reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are strongly reflected and difficult to see. On the other hand, when the center line L of the main irradiation area is inclined with respect to the transparent plate 214a as described above, the outer peripheral surface of the reel is illuminated through the transparent plate 214a, so that the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. It was confirmed that a wide range became bright and easy to see. The reason for this is that the light emitted from the lighting device 502 is reflected by the transparent plate 214a fitted in the transparent window 214 of the door-shaped front member 200 and diffused to the whole, or the reel 301a, It is presumed that the wide range of 301b and 301c looks bright or is due to their synergistic action.

  The structure of the upper illumination device 502 as described above can also be adopted in the lower illumination device 502, and of course, it can be adopted only in the lower illumination device 502 as shown in FIG. 32 is a diagram in which the upper illumination device 502 in FIG. 4 is disposed on the lower side and the lower illumination device 502 is disposed on the upper side. Therefore, “upper” in the description of the illumination device 502 is “lower”. And read “below” as “upper”.

  When the LED is used as the light source of the lighting device 502 as in the embodiment, (a) since it is driven at a low voltage, the safety is higher than that of a conventional cold cathode tube driven at a high voltage of about 200V. ) Longer life than a cold cathode tube, (c) Stronger than a cold cathode tube that is a glass tube, (d) Multi-color emission is possible, so the range of production can be expanded, (e) Combined with an inverter Therefore, there is a merit that it is lighter than the cold-cathode tube used, and therefore the burden on the hinge fitting 420 that supports the image display body 500 is small.

[7. Wiring means]
For example, each of the insertion buttons 205 and 206 and the start lever 210 (hereinafter simply referred to as “generic names” in the operation unit 202 of the medal discharge device 110, the power supply device 112, and the door-shaped front member 200 attached to the outer main body 100. The main body 409, etc. in the case member 400 (sometimes simply referred to as “case member side electric component” as a generic term for the case member side electric component). Connected. In the slot machine 1 according to the embodiment, the model unit 50 (see FIGS. 44 and 45) including the front opening / closing member 90 and the case member 400 is detachable from the outer main body 100. At this time, rational wiring means is provided for easily connecting or disconnecting the main body side electrical component (housing side electrical component) and the case member side electrical component.

[7-1. Wiring means-wiring relay member]
As described above, the wiring relay member 113 shown in FIG. 14 is attached to the upper part of the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. 4 and 5, the wiring relay member 113 is located at a position corresponding to the wiring window 411 of the case member 400 and faces the empty space 417 of the case member 400 from the wiring window 411. Yes. The wiring relay member 113 relays the main body side wirings 119 connected to the main body side electric parts and the case side wirings 423 connected to the case member side electric parts, and is connected to the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. A mounting plate 120 to be screwed, a cover body 121 covering the front surface of the mounting plate 120, and a plurality of (two in the embodiment, large and small) connector boards (hereinafter referred to as “mounting board”). It may also be referred to as a “connector connection terminal board”.

  Of the two connector boards 122 and 123, the larger connector board 122 located on the left side in FIGS. 14 and 15 is fixedly attached to the mounting plate 120, and is connected to the main board 409. A connector 124 that is paired with the connector 425 at the tip of the harness 424 is provided.

  On the other hand, the smaller connector board 123 located on the right side in FIGS. 14 and 15 is attached in a non-fixed and free-movable state in the gap between the mounting plate 120 and the cover body 121. Accordingly, FIG. As shown in Fig. 4, the movable member can move in the vertical direction and can move in the horizontal direction. This small connector board 123 is provided with a connector 125 that makes a pair with the connector 427 at the tip of the harness 426 connected to the case member side electrical components other than the main board 409. The connector 125 and the connector 124 are board-fixed types that are fixed to a printed circuit board by fixing means such as soldering, and inexpensive DIN standards are used.

  Further, the cover body 121 covering the front surface of the mounting plate 120 includes two large and small openings 126 and 127 through which the connectors 124 and 125 pass, a support cylinder 128 protruding in a position side by side with the openings 126 and 127, and a lower half. And a tunnel-like wiring duct 129 projecting forward.

  The main body side wiring 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 passes through the inside of the wiring duct 129 or is bundled with a hook-shaped wiring stopper 130 protruding from the lower front surface of the mounting plate 120 of the wiring relay member 113. 1 are distributed to the side plates 102 and 102 of the outer main body 100 as shown by a one-dot chain line L in FIG. 1, and the direction is changed substantially vertically near the corners of the side plates 102 and 102 and the back plate 104, many of which are The wiring board 109 is connected to the electrical component on the main body side through the wiring opening 109 provided in the back of the partition plate 105. Of course, when there is a main body side electrical component (for example, the external relay terminal plate 131 provided on the inner surface of the side plate 102 in FIG. 1) in the region above the partition plate 105, regardless of the wiring opening 109 of the partition plate 105. Connected as is.

From the wiring means described so far, the following technical idea can be grasped.
(A) The rear plate 405 of the case member 400 is self-exposed between a horizontal plane passing through the rotation center of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 and a horizontal plane passing through the highest height position of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c. The wiring window 411 is formed at a height at which the lower side is located.
(B) A wiring relay member 113 is installed on the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 to relay the main body side wirings 119 connected to the main body side electric parts and the case side wirings 423 connected to the case member side electric parts.
(C) A vertical wiring path through which wiring passes along the inner surfaces of the side plates 102 and 102 of the outer main body 100 is formed.
(D) The main body side wiring 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 is guided to the side of the case member 400, and is connected to the main body side electrical component through the wiring path therefrom.

  In the gaming machine having the components (a) to (d) above, the main body side wirings 119 do not pass behind the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300, and the side plates 102, 102 of the outer main body 100 are connected. Since the wiring path provided along the corner (including the corner with the back plate 104 (see FIG. 10)) is bypassed, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c can be brought close to the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. The diameter of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is larger than that of the conventional configuration, that is, the conventional configuration in which the main body side wirings 119 pass through the back of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c almost down the center of the back plate 104. Can be bigger. The larger the diameter of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, the greater the force at the time of rotation.

[7-2. Wiring means-connectors 425 and 427]
As described above, the two connectors 124 and 125 provided on the wiring relay member 113 include the connector 425 at the tip of the harness 424 connected to the main board 409 of the case member 400 and the case member side other than the main board 409. The connectors 427 at the ends of the harnesses 426 connected to the electrical components are respectively connected.

  The two connectors 425 and 427 are integrally attached to one connector holder 428 as shown in FIG. The connector holder 428 includes a holder main body 429 to which the connectors 425 and 427 are screwed, a plate-like attachment piece 431 that has a through hole 430 at a substantially central portion and protrudes on both sides of the holder main body 429, and It consists of a well-known button-type panel fastener 432 (trade name “Nylatch”: registered trademark) mounted in the through hole 430 of the attachment piece 431, and as shown in FIGS. 5 and 8A, the wiring relay member 113 An attachment piece 431 is applied to the tip of the support cylinder 128, and a button-shaped panel fastener 432 of the attachment piece 431 is inserted into the support cylinder 128 and locked. Therefore, since the connector holder 428 is fixed to the support cylinder 128 serving as a fixing means, and further fixed to the wiring relay member 113, the connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 cannot be disconnected.

[7-2-1. Wiring Relay Board-Connector 425, 427-Temporary Stop Shelf]
As described above, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected to the connectors 124 and 125 of the wiring relay member 113. However, before the case member 400 is assembled into the outer main body 100, that is, from the factory shipment to the completion of installation, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected. 427 is temporarily fixed to a temporary fixing shelf 418 provided in the case member 400.

  The temporary fixing shelf 418 is a shelf-like member that faces the wiring window 411 from the inside of the case member 400 as shown in FIGS. 5, 6, 12, and 13, and is shown in FIG. In this way, a substantially horizontal bench portion 433 on which the connector holder 428 is placed, a bench side plate 434 erected on both ends of the bench portion 433, and three inward claw pieces 435, 435 protruding from each bench side plate 434. , 435. Between the central one of the inward claw pieces 435, 435, and 435 and the other two on the upper and lower sides, there is an interval at which the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be fitted. One bench side plate 434 has a thin plate structure in which a finger hook portion 436 is extended at the tip, and is supported at one end by applying a force in the X direction indicated by an arrow in FIG. It can be bent outward like a leaf spring, and the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be easily detached from the inward claw pieces 435, 435, 435 in the bent state. The imaginary line in FIG. 8A shows an example in which the tip of the finger hook portion 436 is bent into a key shape. By doing so, the connector holder 428 can be removed just like pressing the button as indicated by arrow Y. It can be done easily.

  6, the connector holder 428 is placed on the bench portion 433 of the temporary fixing shelf 418, and the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 is attached to the inward claw pieces 435, 435 of the bench side plate 434. The connector holder 428 is temporarily fixed to the temporary fixing shelf 418 by being fitted between 435. Of course, even if it is temporarily fixed, the connector holder 428 is set to have a strength that does not come off the temporary fixing shelf 418 during transportation of the case member 400, and therefore, before the case member 400 is assembled into the outer body 100, The connectors 425 and 427 integrated with the connector holder 428 are temporarily fixed to a temporary fixing shelf 418 provided in the case member 400 and do not move. Therefore, during the operation of transporting the case member 400 or assembling the case member 400 into the outer main body 100, the connectors 425 and 427 at the tips of the harnesses 424 and 426 hit the parts in the case member 400 and, of course, the parts. There is no danger of damaging itself.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 8B → FIG. 8A, in the wiring process after the case member 400 is fixed to the outer main body 100, one bench side plate 434 is bent outward as described above. When the connector holder 428 is removed from the temporary fixing shelf 418 and the connector holder 428 is moved to a position where the attachment piece 431 thereof contacts the support tube 128 of the wiring relay member 113, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected to the connector of the wiring relay member 113. 124 and 125 (details will be described later), the button-shaped panel fastener 432 of the attachment piece 431 is pushed in that state, and the attachment piece 431 is locked to the support cylinder 128. At this time, as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIGS. 5 and 6, if the guide rail 440 for guide is provided on the bench portion 433, it is only necessary to push the connector holder 428 inward, so that workability is improved. improves.

  The connector holder 428 attached to the wiring relay member 113 as described above is stable with the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 as a supporting base and is not in contact with the case member because it is separated from the case member. Even if 100 and the model unit 50 move relatively, an unreasonable load is not applied.

From the explanation so far, the following technical idea can be grasped.
(A) an outer body having a box shape in which the front surface is open and the back surface is covered with a back plate, and the power supply device and other body side electrical components are provided;
(B) a model unit provided with a symbol variation display device for changing a plurality of symbols on a case member detachably attached to the outer main body, and other case member side electrical components;
(C) a wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer main body to relay the main body side wiring connected to the main body side electric component and the case side wiring connected to the case member side electric component;
(D) a connector attached to the tip of the case-side wiring;
(E) a connector holder attached to the connector;
(F) a temporary fixing member provided in the case member for temporarily fixing the connector holder;
(G) fixing means for fixing the connector holder to the wiring relay member, and (h) temporarily fixing the connector holder to the temporary fixing member in a state before the model unit is mounted on the outer body. (I) A gaming machine, wherein the connector holder is changed from the temporary fixing member to the fixing means while the model unit is mounted on the outer body, and the connector of the connector holder is connected to the wiring relay member.

  In the above gaming machine, the mounting of the model unit 50 to the outer main body 100 and the connection of the connectors are performed separately. In contrast, for example, a connector is directly attached to the model unit 50. A method of automatically connecting the connectors by the operation of pushing the model unit 50 into the outer main body 100 is conceivable. However, in this method, when the model unit 50 having a large mass vibrates inside the outer main body 100 during transportation or the like, a heavy burden is applied to the connector coupling portion, so there is a concern about reliability, and there is a problem that costs for the countermeasure are high. is there.

  The gaming machine of the present invention has a configuration in which one door-type front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100, and the model unit 50 is physically independent from the door-type front member 200. In contrast, a gaming machine in which the door-shaped front member is divided into two upper and lower stages and the upper door-shaped front member is a part on the model unit 50 side is also conceivable. However, in such a gaming machine, when a player who is excited during the game hits the upper door-shaped front member, a direct impact is applied to the connector coupling portion, so that the coupling of the connector may become unstable. There is a problem that requires a new security structure for the joint between the upper and lower door-shaped front members.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention has a configuration in which one door-shaped front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100, and the model unit 50 is physically independent from the door-shaped front member 200. After the connector holder 428 is connected to the wiring relay member 113, the connector holder 428 is coupled to a component (wiring relay member 113) fixed to the outer body 100 and separated from the model unit 50 as shown in FIG. 5. Therefore, even when a low-cost general connector used by soldering to a printed circuit board is used, there is no concern about reliability and durability during transportation and gaming. In addition, only the model unit 50 is an object to be replaced when the model is changed, and the door-shaped front member 200 is not an object to be replaced.

[7-2-2. Connector 425, 427 and connectors 124, 125]
As described above, the connector 425 and the connector 427 are attached to one connector holder 428. By doing so, the connection of the two connectors 425 and 427 is completed by one operation of setting the connector holder 428 to a predetermined position of the wiring relay member 113. However, as a practical problem, in the structure in which the independent elements of the two connectors 425 and 427 and the connector holder 428 are gathered together and integrated, the problem of “accurate positioning” between the connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 becomes a difficult problem. encounter. That is, if the positioning of the four elements of the two connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 on the wiring relay member 113 side is not accurate, the connectors 425 and 124 and the connectors 427 and 125 cannot be coupled together. This is because it is difficult to achieve such positioning accuracy at the cost of mass-produced products. As one means for solving such a problem, a method of using a so-called drawer connector having a mechanism for enhancing flexibility at the time of connection without soldering to a printed circuit board can be considered, but the drawer connector itself is expensive. Therefore, the cost burden is still large.

  On the other hand, in the wiring means of the embodiment, the connector boards 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113 as the board support member are divided and the connectors 124 and 125 are respectively attached, and at least one of the connector boards 122 and 123 is wired. A direction that is non-fixedly placed in the gap between the mounting plate 120 of the relay member 113 and the cover body 121 and is orthogonal to the connecting direction of the connector 427 and the connector 125 (here, “orthogonal” is not strictly 90 degrees). , Meaning that it is about 90 degrees on social belief)). In such a configuration, when the connection aim of the connector holder 428 is set to the connector 425 and the connector 124, even if there is a slight deviation in the relative position of the other connector 427 and the connector 125, the connector board 123 moves and the deviation is corrected. Since it moves to correct, connector 427 and connector 125 can also be coupled. Thus, a board-fixed and inexpensive DIN standard connector can be sufficiently used.

From the explanation so far, the following technical idea can be grasped.
(1) “In a gaming machine having two or more wiring connectors and two or more wiring connectors that are paired with each connector, one connector group is fixed to one connector holder and paired with these connectors. The connector board is mounted on the connector board, the connector board is further divided for each connector, one of them is fixed to the board support member, and the other connector board is connected to the board support member in the connector coupling direction. A gaming machine characterized by being mounted so as to be movable in an orthogonal direction. "
(2) “A plurality of symbols are attached to an outer body having a box shape in which the front surface is open and the back surface is covered with a back plate, and includes a power supply device and other body-side electrical components; and a case member that is detachable from the outer body. In order to relay a model unit provided with a variable symbol display device and other case member side electric parts, main body side wirings connected to the main body side electric parts, and case side wirings connected to the case member side electric parts A wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer main body; two or more connectors attached to the tip of the case side wiring; a connector holder that collectively supports the two or more connectors as a connector group; and the connector A fixing means for fixing the holder to the wiring relay member and a board that is paired with each connector of the two or more connector groups and is fixed to the printed board A connector connection terminal board, which is attached to a wiring relay member attached to the back plate and to which the connector of the other connector group is fixed. The connector terminal board is divided for each connector and one of them is fixed to the wiring relay member, and the other connector connecting terminal board is attached to the wiring relay member so as to be movable in a direction perpendicular to the connector coupling direction. A gaming machine characterized by doing so. "
(3) In a gaming machine having “two or more wiring connectors and two or more wiring connectors paired with each connector, one connector group is fixed to the board support member via the connector board. In addition, another connector group that is paired with these is attached to one connector holder, and one connector in the connector group is fixed to the connector holder, and the other connector is connected to the connector holder in the direction of connector connection. A gaming machine characterized by being mounted so as to be movable in an orthogonal direction. "
(4) “A plurality of symbols are provided on an outer body having a box shape in which the front surface is open and the back surface is covered with a back plate and provided with a power supply device and other body-side electrical components; and a case member detachable from the outer body. In order to relay a model unit provided with a variable symbol display device and other case member side electric parts, main body side wirings connected to the main body side electric parts, and case side wirings connected to the case member side electric parts A wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer main body; two or more connectors attached to the tip of the case side wiring; a connector holder that collectively supports the two or more connectors as a connector group; and the connector A fixing means for fixing the holder to the wiring relay member and a board that is paired with each connector of the two or more connector groups and is fixed to the printed board And a connector connection terminal board that is attached to a wiring relay member attached to the back plate and to which a connector of the other connector group is fixed, and the connector holder. On the other hand, a gaming machine characterized in that one connector in the connector group is fixed and the other connector is attached to the connector holder so as to be movable in a direction perpendicular to the connector coupling direction.

  The above gaming machines are designed so that the connector holder is operated by aiming at the connector of the fixed connector connection terminal board, even if there is a slight deviation due to manufacturing error etc. in the relative position between other connectors, Since the non-fixed connector connection terminal board moves together with the connector and moves to correct the deviation and absorbs the error, it is possible to connect the connectors which are not the joint aim. Accordingly, it is possible to collectively connect a plurality of systems of connectors using one connector holder. In addition, the connector used is a general-purpose and inexpensive, for example, DIN standard soldered to a printed circuit board, and the cost is low.

  In addition, the connector holder is securely fixed to the back plate of the outer main body through the wiring relay member, and by extension, the wiring relay member, by fixing means such as Nylatch (registered trademark). On the other hand, the connector holder and the model unit are only connected via a flexible harness. Even if the model unit moves, the movement is not transmitted to the connector holder because the flexible harness absorbs the movement. . For this reason, even if a relative movement occurs between the outer body and the model unit due to vibration during transportation, the connector holder moves only with the outer body and is not affected by the model unit. No load is applied to the part. Therefore, the reliability of connector connection is very high.

  As in the embodiment, the configuration in which the small connector board 123 corresponding to the small connector 125 is movable and the large connector 425 and the connector 124 are used as a reference for coupling is compared to the opposite configuration. , 427, 125 can be easily combined. This is because the smaller connector board 123 can be handled with a lighter force, so that it is easy to automatically correct the deviation. In the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the connectors 425 and 124 are coupled before the other connectors 427 and 125, so that the connectors for coupling aiming can be easily matched.

  Further, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 9, the chamfered portion C (the chamfered portion C ( If a straight chamfering or a curved chamfering is possible, the guiding action along the taper of the chamfered portion C makes the connectors more connectable.

  In addition to the configuration in which the connector boards 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113 are movable as in the embodiment, it is also possible to allow any one of the connectors 425 and 427 on the connector holder 428 side to be movable. In this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained. A specific example of the connector holder 428 is shown in FIG. In this example, a receiving cylinder 429a with a female thread is provided on the holder main body 429 of the connector holder 428, while ear pieces 427b having free holes 427a on both sides of the connector 427 are formed, and the receiving cylinder 429a of the connector holder 428 is formed. The loose hole 427a of the connector 427 is loosely fitted, and a screw 427c with a washer is used to prevent the ear piece 427b from coming off. By doing so, the connector 427 can freely move with respect to the connector holder 428 within the range of the difference in diameter between the free hole 427a and the receiving tube 429a. In this case, the connector boards 122 and 123 may be fixed to the mounting plate 120 integrally. In the embodiment, two connectors are handled as one connector group, but the number of connectors in one connector group may be two or more.

  Further, in the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 12, the back of the rear plate 405 of the case member 400 is recessed toward the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 of the symbol variation display device 300. A cable groove 437 is formed, and wiring ports 438 and 438 penetrating the side plate 404 (or the rear plate 405) of the case member 400 are opened near both ends of the cable groove 437. The wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 are for connecting the symbol variation display device 300 and the main board 409 and the like. In FIG. The cable 313 (see FIG. 12) of the reel substrate 312 provided on the non-hinge side surface of the door-shaped front member 200 is pulled out of the case member 400 from one wiring port 438, and the cable 313 is as shown in FIG. The cable is inserted into the cable groove 437, and the tip of the cable 313 is returned from the other wiring port 438 into the case member 400 to be connected to the main board 409 or the like. The cable groove 437 is provided with cable stoppers 439 at predetermined intervals so that the cable 313 does not fall off from the cable groove 437.

  Thus, the main board 409 and the reel board 312 are both case member-side electrical components in the case member 400, and it is not necessary to pull out the cable 313 outside the case member 400. The reason why the case member 400 is intentionally provided with the wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 to bypass the cable 313 to the outside is as follows.

  The installation location of the reel substrate 312 is a non-hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200 among the side surfaces of the symbol variation display device 300 (device case 302) in consideration of the workability of wiring for inserting and removing connectors in a limited space. The side corresponding to is preferable. On the contrary, if the reel substrate 312 is provided on the side surface of the device case 302 corresponding to the hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200, the door-shaped front member 200 (see FIG. 1) that is fully opened and the reel substrate 312 are close to each other. This is because a large working space required for inserting and removing the connector cannot be secured because of facing each other.

  However, on the other hand, the connection part of the boards (main board 409, effect control board 510, image display body 500, etc.) to be connected to the reel board 312 is on the side corresponding to the hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200 of the case member 400. Then, the cable 313 looks like it crosses the inside of the case member 400. Then, the cable 313 may be caught when the device case 302 is attached to the case member 400, or the cable 313 may be caught when the device case 302 is pulled out.

  On the other hand, if the case member 400 is provided with the wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 to bypass the cable 313 to the outside as in the embodiment, the trouble of the cable 313 as described above does not occur. In addition, the wiring work is better when the device case 302 is slightly pulled out from a predetermined position, and accordingly, the length of the cable 313 from the wiring port 438 to the reel board 312 is also the wiring cost. There is room to say. Accordingly, the cable 313 is slackened with the apparatus case 302 set at a predetermined position, and the cable 313 is slackened depending on the amount of pull-out. When the slack of the cable 313 is large, the cable 313 is formed in a triangular space formed between the lower swash plate 310 of the apparatus case 302 and the corner portion at the back of the case member 400, which is located side by side with the wiring port 438. The loose part of can be escaped.

  Further, when the cable groove 437 is inflated toward the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 as in the embodiment, it is between the back of the case member 400 and the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302. Useful for effective use of dead space. Note that wiring using the wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 is not limited to the cable 313 of the reel substrate 312, and can be applied to all cables crossing the inside of the case member 400.

  In addition, in FIG. 11, the code | symbol 441 is a function separation relay terminal board.

  The slot machine 1 configured as described above is shipped from the factory in a finished product state in which the case member 400 is mounted on the outer main body 100 and necessary wiring is completed. Then, the finished product is attached to the game machine installation island of the amusement hall. At this time, as shown in an imaginary line in FIG. When stopping with the fixing member 601, the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 are opened, and the fixing member 601 is inserted into the through hole 132 of the outer main body 100 from the inside of the case member 400 through the skylight 443, The fixing member 601 is tightened over the skylight 443 with a tool 602 such as a screwdriver, and the top plate 103 of the outer main body 100 and the upper rail 600 of the gaming machine installation island are fixedly connected. In addition, since the through-hole 132 is provided with two or more, it can be arbitrarily selected and used as needed. For example, even if the position and size of the upper beam 600 vary, the through hole 132 corresponding to the upper beam 600 can be selected. Further, when the entire gaming machine is replaced, if the through-hole 132 to be used is changed, it is possible to prevent the adverse effect that the hole of the fixing member 601 is opened at the same position of the upper rail 600 (so-called fool hole formation).

  Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 25, a gap S is formed between the outer main body 100 and the case member 400, and heat generated from the image display body 500 or the like is used to cool the image display body 500 (not shown). Then, it passes from the skylight portion 443 of the case member 400 through the gap S to the vent hole 133 of the back plate 104, and from there to the inside of the gaming machine installation island. At this time, there is a wiring relay member 113 between the back plate 104 and the case member 400, which acts like a barrier and closes the gap S over a wide range. Therefore, the hot air flowing through the gap S is blocked by this portion, and the wiring relay member 113 It is positively discharged to the outside from the vent hole 133 of the back plate 104 located above. Therefore, the heat dissipation effect is high.

[8. Each reel symbol, symbol row]
As an example, in each reel 301a, 301b, 301c, as shown in FIG. 46, a series of symbols (arranged from array numbers 1 to 21) is formed by arranging a plurality of types of symbols at regular intervals. A reel band (symbol band) on which a total of 21 symbols) is written is attached. FIG. 46 shows a state in which the symbol rows written on the reel bands 321a, 321b, and 321c attached to the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are developed in a plane. In addition, in order to identify the symbol arrange | positioned in a symbol row | line | column, the said sequence number is described for convenience.

  Each of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c has a predetermined number (for example, three) of consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged in each symbol row, and the opening 401 (also referred to as symbol display window, hereinafter symbol). It is arranged so as to be visible to the player via the display window 401 (see FIG. 47 described next). The symbol display window 401 corresponds to the symbol display unit described in the solving means.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 46, the types of symbols include “7” symbol painted in red (hereinafter referred to as “red 7 symbol”), “7” symbol painted in blue (hereinafter “7” symbol). "Blue 7 design"), "BAR design", "Cherry design with cherry design", "Replay design", "Bell 1 design", "Bell 2 design", "Watermelon design", " There are “design” (designated as “right”) and “design” (designated as “right”).

  In FIG. 46, “Red 7 design” indicates that the reel band 321a has two array numbers 3 and 6, the reel band 321b has one array number 12, and the reel band 321c has array number 10 One corresponds. “Blue 7 design” corresponds to one of array number 16 in the reel band 321a, one of array number 3 in the reel band 321b, and one of array number 15 in the reel band 321c. “BAR design” (Hanasei Gakuen) is one of the array number 11 in the reel band 321a, two of array numbers 7 and 9 in the reel band 321b, and one of array number 2 in the reel band 321c. Corresponds. “Cherry design” is one of array number 10 in the reel band 321a, three of array numbers 1, 14, and 17 in the reel band 321b, and array number 7 and 14 in the reel band 321c. Two of the numbers correspond. The “replay symbols” are five in the reel band 321a: array numbers 1, 4, 7, 12, and 17, and in the reel band 321b, array numbers 0, 5, 8, 11, In the reel band 321c, five of the array numbers 1, 5, 8, 13, 13, and 17 correspond to the reel band 321c. "Bell Design 1" has three arrangement numbers 13, 15, and 18 in the reel band 321a, and five arrangement numbers 2, 6, 10, 15, and 18 in the reel band 321b. In the reel band 321c, three of array numbers 9, 12, and 16 correspond. “Bell design 2” corresponds to three of array numbers 2, 5, and 8 in the reel band 321a, and three of array numbers 0, 4, and 18 in the reel band 321c. “Watermelon design” has three arrangement numbers 9, 14, and 19 in the reel band 321a, two arrangement numbers 4 and 13 in the reel band 321b, and arrangement number 3 in the reel band 321c.・ No. 6 and No. 11 correspond. The “definition symbol” corresponds to one of array number 20 in the reel band 321a, one of array number 19 in the reel band 321b, and one of array number 19 in the reel band 321c. The “normal symbol” corresponds to one of array number 0 in the reel band 321a, one of array number 20 in the reel band 321b, and one of array number 20 in the reel band 321c. In addition, the kind of design is an example, Comprising: It is not restricted to these kinds.

[9. Frame member]
FIG. 47 shows the enlarged portion of the frame member 501 including the symbol display window 401. From the symbol display window 401, three consecutive symbols among the symbols in the symbol row of each reel 301a, 301b, 301c are visible. The three positions where this symbol is displayed are “upper (or upper position)” (for example, the position where “bell 1 symbol” of the reel 301a is displayed), “middle (or middle position)” (for example, , A position where the “replay symbol” of the reel 301b is displayed) and a “lower stage (or lower position)” (for example, a position where the “bell 1 symbol” of the reel 301c is displayed).

  From the above, it is possible to display “number of stages × number of reels” symbols in the symbol display window 401. Therefore, in the slot machine 1, a maximum of nine symbols can be displayed in the symbol display window 401 by “the number of stages (3) × the number of reels (3)”.

  Various lamps are provided on the left side of the frame member 501 (also referred to as a display panel, which will be unified as the display panel 501 below) on the left side when viewed from the symbol display window 401. Among them, “BET1”, “BET2 ”And“ BET 3 ”are BET lamps (bet lamps) 614. The numbers of the BET lamps (the numbers 1, 2, and 3 of“ BET 1 ”,“ BET 2 ”, and“ BET 3 ”above) are as follows. Each corresponds to the number of bets (the number of bets, the number corresponding to the number of medals bet), that is, “1” is one bet (the number of bets placed is one) and “2” is 2 bets (the number of medals bet is 2), and “3” corresponds to 3 bets (also called a MAX bet, the number of medals bet is 3).

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, an effective arrangement is determined according to the number of bets. This “effective arrangement” is also called an effective line. Hereinafter, it is referred to as an effective line. A combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination, which will be described later, is determined to be displayed as a combination mode of symbols corresponding to the winning combination only after being displayed side by side on one active line. That is, even if each symbol constituting a symbol corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is individually displayed in the symbol display window 401, each symbol is not arranged on any active line (that is, the predetermined symbol is displayed). If the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not arranged on the active line), it is not determined that the symbol combination mode corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed. As described above, when the symbol combinations corresponding to the predetermined winning combination are not arranged on the active line, it is determined that the disparate symbol combination mode (that is, the lost symbol combination) is displayed.

  Next, the bet number and the effective line will be specifically described. The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is a three-wager dedicated machine, and in a normal game, the game can be executed when three medals are inserted. At this time, a straight line arrangement that rises to the right and a straight line arrangement that falls to the right are effective lines.

  Note that the effective lines are not limited to the above-described straight-up linear arrangement or the down-right linear arrangement. Furthermore, although the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is a three-bet dedicated machine, the number of active lines may be changed according to the number of bets instead.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the number of bets is only 3 bets (MAX bets), and the effective line is displayed in the symbol display window 401 of FIG. 47 as “BAR symbol-replay symbol-definition symbol”. Only two lines, that is, a line (namely, a line rising to the right) 623b and a line displaying "Bell 1 symbol-Replay symbol-Bell 1 symbol" (that is, the right-down line 623a) are valid lines.

  The combination of symbols displayed in the symbol display window 401 of FIG. 47 is “Bell 1 symbol-Replay symbol-Bell 1 symbol” displayed on the right-down line 623a which is one of the effective lines. As shown in FIG. 53, which will be described later, the symbol combination is a symbol combination corresponding to a replay combination (re-playing combination). Therefore, in the next game, an automatic bet is made without inserting medals, and the same as in the previous game. The game can be executed again. Even if “bell 1 symbol-replay symbol-bell 1 symbol” is displayed on the active line, it is difficult for the player to grasp at a glance which combination of symbols is displayed. However, the combination of the symbols “replay symbol-replay symbol-replay symbol” is displayed on the middle line that is not the active line, so that the player can recognize that the player has won the replay.

  In addition, the display panel 501 is provided with lamps and LEDs that can be lit (or blinked) in accordance with the gaming state of the slot machine 1. From the top of the figure, these lamps are an error lamp 604 on which the characters “ERR” are drawn, a replay lamp 606 on which characters “REP” are drawn, which is located immediately below the BET lamp 614, and “STR”. A start lamp 608 with the letters “INS”, a medal IN lamp 610 with the letters “INS”, and a payout number display LED 612 having two side-by-side 7-segment LEDs. In addition to these, a bonus notification lamp for notifying the winning of a bonus game, which will be described later, a 7-segment LED for displaying the cumulative payout number of medals in a bonus game, etc., and counting the bonus game are provided separately. Also good.

  The error lamp 604 starts to light (or flashes) when any trouble or failure occurs during the game of the slot machine 1, and indicates that a trouble or the like is currently occurring. Have a role to inform.

  The replay lamp 606 has a role of notifying the player that a game can be replayed (a game can be played again without betting a new medal) when the game result is a replay (described later).

  The start lamp 608 starts to light (or flash) when the number of bets reaches the MAX bet, and has a role of prompting the player to operate the start lever 210 (start operation).

  The medal IN lamp 610 continues to light (or blink) until the bet number reaches the maximum (MAX bet), thereby having a role of prompting the player to place a bet.

  The payout number display LED 612 has a role of notifying the player of the number of medals paid out by displaying the number of payouts (number of medals to be paid out) when there is a payout of medals accompanying the game result.

[10. Slot machine internal configuration]
FIG. 48 schematically shows configurations of various mechanism elements, electronic devices, operation members, and the like that are installed in the slot machine 1. The slot machine 1 has a main board 409 for comprehensively controlling the progress of the game. The main board (main control board) 409 is mounted with a CPU 1110, a ROM 1112, a RAM 1114, an input / output interface 1116, and the like. ing.

  The above-described single-loading buttons 205 and 206, start lever 210, reel stop buttons 211a, 211b and 211c, storage release switch 209, etc. are all connected to the main board 409, and these operation buttons use sensors (not shown). Thus, an operation by the player can be detected, and the detected operation signal can be output to the main board 409. Specifically, when the start lever 210 is operated, an operation signal for starting the above-described symbol variation display device 300 (starting the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c) is output to the main board 409, and the reel stop button 211a. , 211b, 211c are operated, operation signals for stopping the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are output to the main board 409, respectively.

  Hereinafter, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are referred to as a left reel 301a, a middle reel 301b, and a right reel 301c, respectively, as necessary. The corresponding reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are referred to as a left reel stop button 211a, a middle reel stop button 211b, and a right reel stop button 211c.

  The slot machine 1 accommodates other devices together with the main substrate 409, and various signals are input from these devices to the main substrate 409. In addition to the symbol variation display device 300, the devices include a medal discharge device 110 and the like.

  The symbol variation display device 300 includes reel drive motors 341a, 341b, and 341c for rotating the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c (left reel drive motor 341a, middle reel drive motor 341b, and right reel drive motor 341c). This reel drive motor is composed of a stepping motor, and each of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c can be rotated and stopped independently. During the rotation, a plurality of types of symbols are continuously displayed from top to bottom in the symbol display window 401. Is displayed while changing. The reel drive motors 341a, 341b, 341c correspond to movable display body drive means. By the stepping motor, each reel can be rotated by a predetermined number of symbols in the reel special effect processing described later.

  The reels 301a, 301b, and 301c have position sensors 331a, 331b, and 331c for detecting a reference position related to the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. The reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are provided with position sensors 331a, 331b, and 331c, respectively. (Left reel position sensor 331a, middle reel position sensor 331b, right reel position sensor 331c). By inputting detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors to the main board 409, the main board 409 can obtain stop position information of each reel.

  In the medal selector 207, the solenoid 207a and the insertion sensor 207b described above are installed. The insertion sensor 207 b detects medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 203 and outputs a medal detection signal to the main board 409. When the solenoid 207a is OFF, the inserted medal is detected by the insertion sensor 207b. On the contrary, when the solenoid 207a is in the ON state, the passage reaching the insertion sensor 207b in the medal selector 207 is locked out so that the medal insertion is not accepted, and even if the player inserts a medal, the medal selector 207 The medal flowing through the return basket 213 passes through the medal tray 201. At the same time, the function of the insertion sensor 207b is invalidated, so that neither betting by medal insertion nor medal storage is performed.

  The medal releasing device 110 has a payout sensor 110e for detecting the payout medals one by one in the discharge port 110c, and a payout medal signal for each medal is input to the main board 409 from the payout sensor 110e. Has been. The auxiliary storage box 111 for game medals is provided with a medal full sensor 111a. When the number of stored medals exceeds a predetermined number, a detection signal indicating that the number of medals exceeds the predetermined number is sent to the main board. Output to 409. At this time, the image display 500, the error lamp 604, etc. display an error display notifying the abnormality of the medal accumulation, so that the player, the hall employee, etc. are notified that the abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, a control signal is output from the main board 409 to the symbol variation display device 300 and the medal discharge device 110. That is, a drive pulse signal for controlling the start and stop of each of the reel drive motors 341a, 341b, and 341c described above is output from the main board 409. The medal releasing device 110 receives a driving signal from the main board 409 according to the combination of symbols stopped on the active line, and the medal releasing device 110 performs a medal payout operation. At this time, if the number of medals necessary for payout is insufficient or there are no medals in the medal releasing device 110, the number detection by the payout sensor 110e is delayed. When a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the payout sensor 110e outputs a payout medal abnormality signal to the main board 409, and in response, the main board 409 informs that an abnormality has occurred in the medal payout. Is displayed on the error lamp 604, the image display body 500 or the like to notify the player or hall employee that an abnormality has occurred.

  The slot machine 1 includes an effect control board 510 in addition to the main board 409. The effect control board 510 includes a CPU 1118, a ROM 1120, a RAM 1122, an input / output interface 1130, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 1124, and an AMP (audio amplifier). 1126, a sound source IC 1128, and the like are mounted. The effect control board 510 receives various command signals from the main board 409, and controls the display of the image display body 500, the light emission (or lighting, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of the lighting device 502 and the operation of the speaker 512.

  Further, when the external relay terminal board 131 is provided on the main board 409, the slot machine 1 is connected to the hall computer 1200 of the game hall via the external relay terminal board 131. The external relay terminal board 131 plays a role of relaying various signals (inserted medal signal, payout medal signal, game status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 409 to the hall computer 1200.

  In addition, the power supply device 112 is attached with a setting key switch 112t, a reset switch 112u, a power switch 112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed to the outside of the slot machine 1 and can be operated only when the door-shaped front member 200 is opened. Among them, the power switch 112v is for turning on / off the power supply to the slot machine 1, and the setting key switch 112t is for changing the setting (for example, settings 1 to 6) of the slot machine 1. . The reset switch 112u is for canceling an error that has occurred in the slot machine 1, and is also operated when changing the setting together with the setting key switch 112t.

  The above is an example of the internal configuration of the slot machine 1. In a game by the slot machine 1, when the player operates the start lever 210 in a state where the bet number of medals is determined, the reels 301a, 301b, 301c rotate, and thereafter, the player rotates the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c. Is operated, the corresponding reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are controlled to stop, and when all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped, the game result is judged from the combination of symbols on the active line, and necessary. Accordingly, a prescribed number of medals corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is awarded.

  As described above, the reels 321a, 321b, and 321c are attached to the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, respectively (see FIG. 46). Then, when all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped, the display content displayed in the symbol display window 401 (the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line) of the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed. It is determined whether or not a combination mode is displayed. Specifically, in the symbol display window 401, a combination mode of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on at least one of the above-mentioned active lines (upward right line 623b and downward right line 623a). It is determined whether or not. At this time, if the symbol combination corresponding to another winning combination is displayed on the right rising line 623b and the right decreasing line 623a, the combination combination of the symbols corresponding to a plurality of winning combinations is simultaneously displayed. It is determined that the number of medals is displayed, and the total number of medals is paid out. That is, a combination of symbols corresponding to a plurality of winning combinations is displayed on the active line in the symbol display window 401 in an overlapping manner).

  In the following, the case where the combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on any one of the active lines is the symbol corresponding to the (predetermined) winning combination (this is called the winning combination symbol). It is said that the combination is complete or the winning symbol is complete.

  The symbols of the slot machine 1 include “red 7 symbol”, “blue 7 symbol”, “BAR symbol”, “cherry symbol”, “replay symbol”, “bell 1 symbol”, “bell 2 symbol”, “watermelon symbol” As mentioned above, there are “Red 7”, “Blue 7” and “BAR”, which are more conspicuous than other symbols. The design is easy and easy to identify. Here, the ease of identification refers to the level at which the player can easily identify the symbol including the reel being rotated and the reel being stopped. These symbols can be easily stopped while aiming so that these symbols are stopped in the symbol display window 401 when the player performs a stop operation because of the color and size of the symbols even while the reel is rotating. (That is, it is easy to push). Furthermore, as can be seen from FIG. 46, “justice symbol” and “justice symbol” can be read as “justice” in the form of a circle formed by two symbols of “justice symbol” and “justice symbol”. As described above, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other in the vertical direction.

  These symbols are merely symbolic symbols (one symbol does not correspond to the winning combination), but they become a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination by becoming a predetermined combination. . That is, a predetermined game privilege is given. In the following, a combination of symbols allowed corresponding to each winning combination shown in FIG. 49 will be described.

[10-1. Combination of winning roles and symbols]
Here, a winning combination (including what is called a winning combination) of the slot machine 1 and a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination will be described with reference to FIGS. 49, 50, and 51 to 53. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a winning probability for each winning combination of the slot machine 1, and is stored in advance in the ROM 1112 or the like as a winning value determination table. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing each winning combination and a condition device established corresponding to each winning combination, and is stored in the ROM 1112 or the like in advance. 51 to 53 are diagrams showing symbol combinations and medal payout numbers corresponding to each condition device, which are also stored in the ROM 1112 or the like in advance.

  As a gaming state in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a general state, a normal RT, a chance RT, a SB, a bonus inside, and a bonus are prepared. As shown in FIG. 49, the winning probability for each winning combination is determined for each gaming state. As shown in FIG. 49, the chance RT includes a chance RT1, a chance RT2, and a chance RT3 having different probability of loss. Then, when a winning combination is won as a result of the lottery, the condition device corresponding to the winning combination is activated, and the reel stop process described later is performed so that the symbol combination corresponding to the activated condition device is displayed on the active line. Is called. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since one condition device and a reel control pattern correspond one-to-one, if a plurality of reel control patterns are to be prepared for one winning combination, A plurality of conditions may be satisfied for the winning combination. By doing so, it is possible to prepare a plurality of patterns of stopping points (a combination of symbols displayed on the active line) for one winning combination. Here, for the symbol combinations displayed on the active line, “RB1 + Bell 2”, “Watermelon”, “AT1” to “AT10”, “ALL”, “SB1” to “SB3”, “ SB1 + normal lip ”to“ SB3 + normal lip ”will be described as examples.

  “RB1 + Bell2” is a duplicate combination in which RB1 and Bell2 are simultaneously selected and won. At this time, the condition device corresponding to both RB1 and bell 2 is operated, and it is allowed that the combination of symbols corresponding to these is displayed on the effective line, and based on this, the reel stop in step S5 described later is performed. Processing is performed. When the symbol combination corresponding to the bell 2 is displayed on the effective line, for example, nine medals are paid out as a prize, and when the symbol combination corresponding to RB1 is displayed on the effective line, the description will be given later. The RB1 game to be started is started. However, even if it is permitted to display both the symbol combination corresponding to RB1 and the symbol combination corresponding to Bell 2 on the effective line, the symbol combination corresponding to Bell 2 is given priority. The reel stop process is performed as displayed above. Here, the symbol combination corresponding to the bell 2 is allowed to be displayed on the active line only for the selected game. On the other hand, the combination of symbols corresponding to RB1 is not limited to the selected game, and the combination of symbols corresponding to RB1 is continuously displayed on the active line after the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to RB1 is displayed on the active line. It is allowed to be displayed.

  The duplicate combination means a combination in which a plurality of combinations are selected at the same time in one lottery opportunity. For example, if a carryover combination whose carry-on status is carried over after the next game is selected in the first game, but the symbol combination corresponding to this carryover combination is not displayed, the first combination is played in the second game, for example. When elected, both the carryover role and the first role will be won, but in this case, since they are selected at different lottery opportunities, they do not fall under duplicate roles . On the other hand, a single combination means a combination in which only one combination is selected in one lottery opportunity.

  In addition, BB1, BB2, RB1 and RB2 are used as bonus combinations, and the combination with medals paid out in FIGS. 51 to 53 (for example, cherry, watermelon, bell 1, bell 2, etc.) is used as a small combination, and the same game as the previous game is executed. When a possible combination (for example, a normal lip) is a replay combination and it is allowed to be displayed on the active line for a plurality of symbol combinations at the same time, it corresponds to these in the priority order of the replay combination, small combination, bonus combination The reel stop process described later is performed so that the combination of symbols is displayed on the active line.

  “Watermelon” is a single winning feature of watermelon. At this time, a combination of symbols corresponding to the watermelon is allowed to be displayed on the active line, and based on this, a reel stop process in step S5 described later is performed. When the combination of symbols corresponding to the watermelon is displayed on the active line, for example, five medals are paid out as a prize.

  Even if one of the winning combinations is won as a result of the lottery, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is stopped in the symbol display window 401 (that is, on the active line) within a range in which the pull-in control described later can be performed. If the stop operation (operation to press the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c) is not performed as it is, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination cannot be displayed on the active line. Therefore, if a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed on the active line even though one of the winning combinations is won as a result of the lottery, the game result is lost in step S6 described later. Determined.

  In each of “AT1” to “AT10”, when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in an appropriate push order determined for each, and when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211a are set in an appropriate push order determined for each. The number of medals to be paid out as a prize differs depending on whether 211c is not operated.

  Specifically, an appropriate pressing order for “AT1” and “AT2” is “left → middle → right” (hereinafter referred to as “forward pressing”). When the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in this proper pushing order, it is allowed that the symbol combination of the accessory 17 among the operating condition devices is displayed on the effective line. Based on this, a reel stop process in step S5 described later is performed. When the symbol combination of the accessory 17 is displayed on the active line, for example, nine medals are paid out as a prize. In addition, since the symbols constituting the symbol combination of the accessory 17 are arranged within a range where the reel pull-in control can be performed, when the lottery result is “AT1” or “AT2”, the symbols are pressed in an appropriate push order. As long as the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated, the symbol combination of the accessory 17 is always displayed on the effective line.

  In addition, when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in an inappropriate push order, when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated at an appropriate timing, for example, two medals are paid out as a prize. The combination is displayed on the active line. However, if the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated at an improper timing, the lost symbol combination is displayed on the active line. At this time, medals as prizes are not paid out.

  That is, when the lottery result is “AT1” or “AT2”, the symbol combination of the bell 1 is always displayed on the active line as long as the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in an appropriate pressing order. However, when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in an inappropriate push order, a combination of symbols in which one medal is paid out as a prize when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated at an appropriate timing. Is displayed on the effective line, and if the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated at an inappropriate timing, the symbol combination of the loss is displayed on the effective line.

  The above “appropriate timing” when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in an inappropriate pressing order is different depending on whether the lottery result is “AT1” or “AT2”. Yes. More specifically, the “appropriate timing” when the lottery result is “AT1” is the “improper timing” when the lottery result is “AT2”, and the lottery result is “AT1”. The “inappropriate timing” at the time of “is an appropriate timing” when the lottery result is “AT2”.

  Further, the proper pushing order for “AT3” and “AT4” is “left → right → middle” (hereinafter referred to as “scissor pushing”), and the proper pushing order for “AT5” and “AT6” is “ “Middle → Left → Right” or “Middle → Right → Left” (hereinafter referred to as “Middle press”), and the proper pressing order for “AT7” and “AT8” is “Right → Middle → Left” The proper pressing order for “AT9” and “AT10” is “right → left → middle” (hereinafter referred to as “reverse scissor pressing”). When the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in this proper pushing order, the symbol combination of the accessory 17 is allowed to be displayed on the effective line, and based on this, the later-described step S5 is performed. A reel stop process is performed. However, when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in an inappropriate push order, a combination of symbols in which one medal is paid out as a prize when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated at an appropriate timing. Is displayed on the active line, and if the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated at an inappropriate timing, the symbol combination of the loss is displayed on the active line. Here, the “proper timing” when the lottery results are “AT3”, “AT5”, “AT7”, and “AT9”, the lottery results are “AT4”, “AT6”, “AT8”, respectively. And “incorrect timing” in the case of “AT10”, and “incorrect timing” in the case where the lottery results are “AT3”, “AT5”, “AT7” and “AT9”, respectively, The result is “improper timing” when “AT4”, “AT6”, “AT8”, and “AT10”.

  Note that when the lottery result is any one of “AT1” to “AT10”, the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in an inappropriate pressing order, and the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are further set at an inappropriate timing. In this embodiment, the symbol combination of the loss displayed on the active line by operating the button is referred to as “bell bumps”.

  “ALL” is a role that is a lottery target only during the bonus game. When the lottery result is “ALL”, the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in any push order and at any timing. Even if it exists, it is permitted that the symbol combination of the accessory 17 is displayed on the effective line, and based on this, the reel stop process in step S5 described later is performed. As described above, since the symbols constituting the symbol combination of the small items 17 are arranged within a range where the reel pull-in control can be performed, the symbol combination of the small items 17 is always performed when the lottery result is “ALL”. Is displayed on the active line. When the symbol combination of the accessory 17 is displayed on the active line, for example, nine medals are paid out as a prize.

  Each of “SB1” to “SB3” is a single role called a single bonus, and is a lottery object only when it is in a general state, a normal RT, or a state in SB. If the result of the lottery is any one of “SB1” to “SB3”, it is allowed that the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the active line, and based on this, step S5 to be described later is performed. The reel stop process is performed. When a combination of symbols corresponding to “SB1” to “SB3” is displayed on the active line, the gaming state is controlled to “SB” only in the next game (this next game is called a single bonus game) ).

  Specifically, when the result of the lottery is “SB3”, the condition device corresponding to SB3 is activated, and the symbol combination corresponding to the activated condition device (the symbol combination corresponding to SB3) is on the effective line. When the combination of symbols corresponding to SB3 is displayed on the active line, the gaming state of the next game becomes “SB in progress” shown in FIG.

  When the lottery result is “SB2”, the condition device corresponding to SB2 is activated, and the symbol combination corresponding to the activated condition device (the symbol combination corresponding to SB2) is displayed on the active line. Is acceptable. When the lottery result is “SB1”, the condition device corresponding to SB1 is activated, and the symbol combination corresponding to the activated condition device (the symbol combination corresponding to SB1) is displayed on the active line. Is allowed. When the symbol combination corresponding to SB2 or the symbol combination corresponding to SB1 is displayed on the active line, the gaming state of the next game becomes “SB in progress” shown in FIG.

  It should be noted that when the result of the lottery is “SB1” and “SB2”, in any case, the combination in which the player cannot easily grasp the combination of the displayed symbols on the active line ( It is displayed in a so-called combination. On the other hand, when the result of the lottery is “SB3”, the combination of symbols shown in FIG. 50 is displayed on the effective line, and at this time, although not on the effective line, the lower part of each reel 301a to 301c. Replay symbols are available. Thereby, the player can grasp that the result of the lottery is “SB3”.

  “SB1 + normal lip” to “SB3 + normal lip” are all winning combinations in which the single bonus and the normal replay are simultaneously duplicated, and are not subject to lottery in the general state, normal RT and SB, and the chance RT Only when it is (Chance RT1, Chance RT2, Chance RT3), it is a lottery target. In other words, in the gaming state in which “SB1” to “SB3” are targeted for lottery, “SB1 + normal lip” to “SB3 + normal lip” are not targeted for lottery, and “SB1” to “SB3” are not targeted for lottery. In the gaming state, “SB1 + normal lip” to “SB3 + normal lip” are subject to lottery. When “SB1 + normal lip”, “SB2 + normal lip” or “SB3 + normal lip” is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the normal replay combination is more than the symbol combination corresponding to the SB combination (SB1, SB2, SB3). A reel stop process, which will be described later, is performed so that it is displayed on the active line with priority.

  Here, a bonus role (BB1, BB2, RB1, RB2), a replay role (also called a replay role), a small role (Bell role (Bell 1, Bell 2), a cherry role (Cherry 1, Cherry 2), a watermelon role , AT exclusive combination, ALL combination, bonus game exclusive combination), single bonus combination (SB1, SB2, SB3) will be described.

[10-1-1. Bonus role]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a bonus combination such as BB1, BB2, RB1 or RB2 is won and a combination of symbols corresponding to any of these combinations is displayed on the active line, the BB1 game, the BB2 game, A bonus game such as the RB1 game or the RB2 game is executed. This bonus game is a game that provides an opportunity for a player to concentrate and acquire medals over a plurality of games. However, as shown in FIG. 50, only the BB1 game and the BB2 game can be obtained by the player.

  In the slot machine 1, when the symbol combination corresponding to the activated condition device (the symbol combination shown in FIG. 50) stops on at least one of the right-up line 523b and the right-down line 623a, 1 As a result of each game, a prize corresponding to the symbol combination stopped on the active line is awarded. However, in this case, if a combination of symbols corresponding to two winning combinations is displayed on two active lines such as a right-up line 523b and a right-down line 623a at the same time, the combination of the two symbols The medal is paid out as an award. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of active lines is two, but the number of active lines is three or more, and the three effective lines are simultaneously overlapped to support three or more winning combinations. When a combination of symbols to be displayed is displayed, a medal corresponding to the combination of three or more symbols may be paid out as a prize. However, the maximum number of medals to be paid out in one game (for example, 15) is determined in advance, and the number of medals to be paid out as one game result does not exceed this maximum number.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, single bonus combinations such as SB1, SB2, and SB3 are also prepared. If this single bonus combination is won, only in the next game, it is controlled during the SB shown in FIG. 49 according to the selected SB combination, and the lottery result is any one of “AT1” to “AT10”. Sometimes an AT game is added and a lottery is performed in which an appropriate push order is taught to the player.

[10-1-2. Replay role]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a replay role (also referred to as a replay role), normal replay (described as “normal lip” in FIG. 49) and ART replays 1 to 3 (“ART lip 1” in FIG. 49), "ART Lip 2" and "ART Lip 3") are prepared. The combinations of symbols corresponding to the replay combination are as shown in FIGS. When the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is displayed on the active line, it is determined that the symbol combinations for replay are complete. The normal replay is a winning combination in which the replay 1 condition device is established, and is a winning combination in which a combination of replay symbols can be established in the middle row regardless of the pressing order. On the other hand, the ART replay 1-3 is a winning combination that establishes a combination of specific symbols when the reels are stopped in an appropriate pressing order, respectively. When operated in an inappropriate pressing order, the normal replay symbols The combination takes precedence. Note that the combination of symbols corresponding to the above-mentioned replay combination is difficult for the player to grasp immediately as seen in FIG. 49, but “replay symbol-replay symbol” is displayed on the middle line of the non-effective line. By displaying the symbol combination “replay symbol”, the player can recognize that the player has won the replay.

  As a replay role, there is a BAR replay. The BAR replay is a winning combination used as an opportunity for a special gaming state using a reel special effect of a reel. For example, as will be described later, the BAR replay is a dedicated combination that can be won during a chance ART2 or a chance ART3. Furthermore, the BAR replay is a winning combination that triggers a special gaming state during which the chance ART2 or chance ART3 game, that is, the number of continuous games can be dramatically increased during the ART game.

  When the replay symbol combination is displayed on the active line, a game privilege called a replay game is given. In this replay game, the same game as the game in which the symbol combination of replay is displayed can be executed as a replay without inserting a medal or performing a betting operation. Even if the replay symbol combination is displayed on the active line, a medal as a prize is not paid out.

  A feature of the game privilege of this replay game is that it is not necessary to consume new medals (betting new medals) in the next game instead of paying out medals. In addition, since replay is a winning combination that does not involve paying out medals, it can be said that, for example, by increasing the winning probability, even if the winning frequency increases, there is very little disadvantage to the hole. Therefore, in the slot machine 1, in the normal state (corresponding to the general state and normal RT in the present embodiment), the probability of winning about once every 6 to 7 times is set as the probability (details will be described later). As a result, the amount of medals consumed by the player (the number of medals consumed per fixed time) can be kept within a certain range to some extent. In other words, the winning role of replay can be given a role of suppressing excessive medal consumption in the game progression.

  In addition, the symbols constituting the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination are arranged uniformly on each reel 301a, 301b, 301c (for example, the symbols constituting the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination are also used in the replay combination. By changing the number of other symbols (the symbols that do not constitute the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role) that are arranged between the symbols that constitute the corresponding symbol combination manner from one to four at the maximum), The combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination can be aligned without the need for a selection.

  When a combination of symbols corresponding to normal replay is displayed on the active line, the same game as the game in which the combination of symbols corresponding to normal replay is displayed can only be executed as a replay, but ART replay When the combination of symbols corresponding to 1 to 3 is displayed on the active line, it functions as an opportunity to shift to the chance RT.

  When the winning combination is BAR replay, a replay 1 and a condition device dedicated to BAR replay not shown in FIG. 50 are established. If the answer is correct in the order in which the reel stop buttons are pressed, the condition device dedicated to BAR replay is given priority. When the player operates the reel stop button at an appropriate timing, the main board 409 sets the combination of the BAR symbols that are the winning combination to a predetermined line. Stop along. The combination of BAR symbols may be arranged along the effective line, or the arrangement of symbol combinations in which the combination of BAR symbols is established in the middle line etc. that is not the effective line corresponds to the condition device dedicated to BAR replay It is good also as a symbol combination. On the other hand, if the correct answer is not given in the order in which the reel stop buttons are pressed, priority is given to the replay 1 condition device, and the player can operate the reel stop button at any timing to align the replay symbol combinations in the middle. be able to.

[10-1-3. bell]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, “Bell 1” and “Bell 2” are prepared as bells as described above. The combinations of symbols corresponding to the bell combination are as shown in FIGS. When a combination of symbols corresponding to the bell combination is displayed on the active line, it is determined that the combination of symbols of the bell combination is complete, and medals (for example, nine) as awards are paid out. As shown in FIG. 49, the combination of symbols corresponding to the bell 2 is difficult for the player to grasp immediately. However, the “bell 1 symbol or bell 2 symbol” is displayed on the middle line of the non-effective line. By displaying a combination of “bell 1 symbol-bell 1 symbol or bell 2 symbol”, the player can recognize that the player has won the bell 2. In addition, although the bell 1 symbol and the bell 2 symbol are slightly different in form, both symbols are common in that the same idea such as a bell is caused to the player.

  When a symbol combination corresponding to Bell 1 or a symbol combination corresponding to Bell 2 is displayed on the active line, a predetermined number (for example, nine) of medals are paid out. The payout of medals at this time is performed in the game. As described above, the symbol combination corresponding to the bell 1 or the symbol combination corresponding to the bell 2 can be expected to increase the number of medals or suppress the consumption of medals when the game is advanced. However, if the frequency of the symbol combination corresponding to Bell 1 or the symbol combination corresponding to Bell 2 being displayed on the active line increases, the player can increase the number of medals simply by proceeding with the game. . It should be noted that the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the bell 1 and the symbols corresponding to the bell 2 are arranged on each reel so that they can be displayed on the effective line without going to the center. .

[10-1-4. Cherry role]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, “Cherry 1” and “Cherry 2” are prepared as the cherry roles as described above. The combination mode of the symbols corresponding to this cherry combination is as shown in FIGS. When the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry combination is displayed on the active line, it is determined that the symbol combination of the cherry combination is complete, and a medal (for example, two) as a prize is paid out.

[10-1-5. Watermelon role]
The combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the watermelon combination is as shown in FIGS. When the combination of symbols corresponding to the watermelon combination is displayed on the active line, it is determined that the combination of symbols of the watermelon combination is complete, and medals (for example, five) as awards are paid out.

[10-1-6. AT exclusive role]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, “AT1” to “AT10” are prepared as AT exclusive roles as described above. The combinations of symbols corresponding to these AT exclusive roles are as shown in FIGS. That is, if the result of the lottery is any one of “AT1” to “AT10” and the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in an appropriate pressing order, it corresponds to the accessory 17 among the activated condition devices. The combination of symbols is displayed on the active line. However, even if the result of the lottery is any one of “AT1” to “AT10”, if the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are not operated in an appropriate pressing order, one medal is awarded as a prize. The combination of symbols to which the payout is displayed is displayed, or the symbol combination of the loss is displayed. The symbols constituting the combination of symbols from which one medal is paid out as an award are arranged on each reel so that they can be displayed on the active line without waiting.

[10-1-7. ALL role]
The symbol combinations corresponding to the ALL combination are as shown in FIGS. However, even if the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in any pushing order and at any timing, the reel control is performed so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the accessory 17 among the activated condition devices is displayed on the effective line. Is done.

[10-1-8. Bonus game exclusive role]
Furthermore, there is a bonus game exclusive role as a winning combination that is effective only during the bonus game (in the BB1, BB2, RB1, and RB2 games). This bonus game exclusive combination corresponds to “logo 1” to “logo 7” in FIG. 49, and the combinations of symbols (bonus game exclusive combination symbols) corresponding to these are as shown in FIG.

  When bonus game exclusive role symbols are arranged during the bonus game, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of medals are paid out. The payout of medals at this time is performed in the game. That is, a gaming privilege of paying out 10 medals is awarded when the bonus game exclusive role symbols are arranged. Further, during the bonus game, by making it easy to align the bonus game exclusive roles, it is possible to concentrate and execute a game that is easy to obtain medals. Therefore, the symbols constituting the combination of bonus game exclusive role symbols can be aligned on the active line without pressing.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the bonus game, the bonus game exclusive combination and the ALL combination are subject to lottery, but a winning combination different from these may be provided. Furthermore, a bonus combination such as a bell or a watermelon may be used instead of a bonus game limited winning combination such as a bonus game exclusive combination. In this case, the number of medals to be paid out may be changed between the general state and the bonus game.

[10-1-9. SB role]
In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, “SB1” to “SB3” are prepared as SB roles as described above. The combination mode of the symbols corresponding to these SB combinations is as shown in FIGS. In addition, as described above, the SB combination is drawn as a single combination in the normal state (general state, normal RT), but in the chance RT (chance RT1, chance RT2, chance RT3), as an overlapping combination with the normal replay. Lottery will be selected. In the normal state, as described above, even if the symbol combination corresponding to SB1 or the symbol combination corresponding to SB2 is displayed on the active line, it is difficult for the player to grasp, but the symbol combination corresponding to SB3. Is displayed on the active line, since the replay symbols are arranged in the lower stage of each of the reels 301a to 301c, it is possible to grasp that the lottery result is “SB3”. In the above description, the general state and the normal RT are referred to as the normal state. However, a state corresponding to the chance RT1 of the present embodiment that is lost at the same probability as the general state and the normal RT will be described later. If the ART game is not executed, it may be referred to as a normal state.

  However, in the chance RT (chance RT1, chance RT2, chance RT3), as described above, none of the SB1 to SB3 is drawn alone, and is drawn in the same manner as the normal replay. The When the winning combination is made simultaneously with the normal replay, the reel control is performed so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay 1 among the activated condition devices is displayed on the active line with the highest priority. The combination of symbols corresponding to the replay 1 is a combination in which the replay symbols are displayed in the middle stage that is not the active line. Here, when SB1 to SB3 are won, an AT game is added and a lottery is performed.

  Therefore, especially when the probability of losing in the internal lottery is controlled to the chance RT1 that does not change from the normal state (general state, normal RT), the AT game is added to the lottery as compared to the case of being controlled to the normal state. This increases the frequency of displaying the outcome in which the game is performed, and in turn increases the frequency of giving the player a sense of expectation.

  On the other hand, the probability of being lost in the internal lottery is controlled to a gaming state that is extremely low compared to the normal state (general state, normal RT), or controlled to a chance RT2 where there is no loss in the internal lottery as in this embodiment. Since the appearance frequency of the symbol combination corresponding to the normal replay is extremely high when it is played, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the normal replay is displayed, it is determined whether or not the AT game extra lottery has been performed. It becomes difficult. As a result, when performing an expected performance that attracts the player's interest, such as the possibility that the extra lottery has been performed or the possibility that the extra lottery has been won, the expected production is effective. Can be performed automatically.

[10-1-10. Lost]
If none of the symbol combinations shown in FIGS. Then, in the game that is lost, no medal is given, and no change is made to the game after the next time. It can be said that the loser is a role that does not give the player any game privilege in the game and the next and subsequent games.

  The above is a combination mode of each winning combination in the slot machine 1 and a symbol corresponding to each winning combination.

  Note that these symbols are not limited to the symbols and symbol combinations described above. In addition to the above symbols, a plurality of types of symbols can be newly provided. In addition, the number of winning combinations can be further increased or decreased. Furthermore, the winning combinations described above are not necessarily provided all, and a necessary type of winning combination may be selected as appropriate.

[11. Game processing]
Next, the flow of game processing in the slot machine 1 will be described. The following game processing proceeds in accordance with a processing procedure on a control program executed on the main board 409 (mainly CPU 1110 or the like).

  FIG. 54 shows one processing sequence for one basic game in the slot machine 1. First, in step S1, initial setting for preparing for the game start is executed. Especially when starting up the power supply, etc., check the connection and operation status of the various devices mentioned above, check the existence of backup data, and if backup data exists, return to the state before the power was turned off. Execute.

  In the next step S2, the number of bets is determined by the number of medals inserted from the insertion slot 203, or when there are already stored medals, by pressing the MAX insertion button 206 (or the single insertion button 205). Thus, the operation of the start lever 210 is awaited. That is, the number of bets for one game is determined and the BET process is executed until the start lever 210 can be operated. The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a three-wager dedicated machine that can execute a game by inserting three medals. Therefore, the single sheet insertion button 205 may not be provided.

  In step S3, the game is started by operating the start lever 210 which has been in an operation waiting state in step S2, and an internal lottery process is performed to determine whether or not any winning combination is a result of the internal lottery. Run. This internal lottery process is either in the stage before all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c that start rotating in the next step S4 are in a stopped state (stopped by a player's stop operation). This is executed to determine whether the winning combination is to be the lottery result of the game. That is, only when the lottery result of this lottery corresponds to any winning combination, when the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped, the symbol combination corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is on the active line. It is allowed to stop.

  Next, in step S4, a reel rotation process for starting rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is executed with the end of the internal lottery process in step S3. In this reel rotation process, when all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c start to rotate, the depressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is validated, and the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are validated. An operation valid lamp (not shown) for notifying that is turned on, and a timer count is started until the next reel rotation processing is executed. The operation valid lamp is a lamp built in each of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c.

  In step S5, a reel stop process in which the player presses the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is accepted, the operation valid lamps are turned off in the order of acceptance, and the rotation of the corresponding reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is stopped. Execute.

  In the next step S6, only the two lines of all the ascending lines 623b in step S5 and the line displaying "Bell 1 symbol-Replay symbol-Bell 1 symbol" (that is, the descending right line 623a) are valid lines. When the reel is determined to be in a stopped state, the display contents (the combination of symbols) displayed on the active line and those allowed as a result of the internal lottery determined in the above step S3 A determination process is performed in which the winning combination is determined by collation.

  In step S7, a medal payout process based on the content of the gaming privilege corresponding to the winning combination determined in step 6 is executed. When the winning combination is BB1, BB2, RB1, RB2, SB1, SB2, or replay, the game state is changed (the game state is changed as shown in FIG. 49), and various game benefits such as re-playing are executed. To do.

  The above is the basic one game processing procedure of the slot machine 1. Here, step S2 (BET process), step S3 (internal lottery process), and step S4 (reel rotation process) are performed by the player as a series of external operations. Therefore, these processes (step S2, step S3, step S4) are collectively referred to as a start process. Hereinafter, this starting process will be described in detail.

[11-1. Start processing]
FIG. 55 specifically shows each process performed in the starting process.

  In the starting process, first, in step S101, the operation of the medal insertion or one-sheet insertion button 205 and the MAX insertion button 206 is awaited. If there is a MAX bet operation or a medal insertion, the determination at step S101 is satisfied, and the routine goes to step S102. This determination is satisfied only when a medal corresponding to a MAX bet is inserted (that is, when three or more medals are inserted), or when a one-sheet insertion button 205 or a MAX insertion button 206 is operated as a MAX bet. It is supposed to be.

  In the next step S102, as the acceptance process, the bet number (in this example, only the MAX bet) is determined, and the active line lamp corresponding to the bet number is turned on. The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is a three-wager dedicated machine, and when three medals are inserted, two lines, a right-up line 623b and a right-down line 623a, become effective lines, which indicate this. Turn on the line lamp.

  In step S103, the operation of the start lever 210 is validated. When the operation of the start lever 210 is validated, the operation waits until the operation of the start lever 210 is accepted, and the process proceeds to the next step S104.

  In the next step S104, it is determined whether the operation of the start lever 210 has been validated, and in that case, the operation of the start lever 210 has been accepted. When the operation of the start lever 210 is validated in the previous step S103, when the operation of the start lever 210 by the player is accepted, this determination is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S105.

  Further, the determination in step S101 is not satisfied and the process proceeds to step S104 as long as the player does not perform a bet operation or medal insertion in step S101 or does not result in a MAX bet. At this time, the determination in step S104 is not satisfied, the process returns to step S101, and the subsequent processing is repeated.

  In the replay game, no new medal bet is required. This is automatically set to the MAX bet state when the MAX bet command is stored in the RAM 1114 in the replay game process described later. Thereby, the determination in step S101 is satisfied.

  In step S105, in response to the operation of the start lever 210 in step S104, the operation of the start lever 210 is invalidated.

  Next, in step S106, when the start lever 210 is operated, rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is started, and a random number is extracted based on the operation of the start lever 210. After the random number is extracted, the process proceeds to the next step S107. As for the timing for extracting the random number at this time, an appropriate extraction timing should be set in the programming process, for example, immediately after the start lever 210 is operated or after a predetermined time (for example, after 0.5 seconds). Can do.

  In step S <b> 107, a winning determination (matching of the random number value) is made as to which winning combination corresponds to the extracted random value (hereinafter referred to as the extracted random number value). In this hit determination, the extracted random number values are collated in a hit value determination table described later. The collation of the random number performed here is to determine whether or not the extracted random number value corresponds (matches or matches) to a predetermined winning combination random number value. At this time, when it is determined that the extracted random number value corresponds to any winning combination, the condition device corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is turned ON (= 1) (see FIG. 50). In addition, the winning probability for each winning combination in the winning determination performed by comparing the extracted random number value with the winning determination table is as shown in FIG.

  Then, in the flag process, when determining the winning value determination table as a determination reference when collating the extracted random number value in the game, refer to a game state flag such as a BB game flag to be described later. A hit value determination table in the game is determined. That is, a winning value determination table corresponding to a game state flag that is ON (= 1) in the game is set, and the extracted random number value is collated. The game status flags include a normal RT flag, a chance RT1 flag, a chance RT2 flag, a chance RT3 flag, an SB flag, a bonus internal flag, and a bonus flag. If any of these game state flags is in the OFF (= 0) state, the general state flag is always in the ON (= 1) state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S107 that the extracted random number value does not correspond to any winning combination, it becomes “losing” that does not correspond to any winning combination, and any condition device is not activated (see FIG. 50). ). Here, when any of the condition devices is ON (when established), it is possible to align the symbol combinations corresponding to the established condition devices. The symbol combinations corresponding to each condition device are as shown in FIGS. Therefore, in the case of a loss in which no condition device is established, the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination cannot be aligned on the effective line. Steps S106 and S107 described above are performed by random number lottery inside the slot machine 1. Hereinafter, these steps are collectively referred to as internal lottery or internal lottery. Note that the process from extraction of the random number to flag processing corresponds to internal lottery (step S3 in FIG. 54 described above).

  Then, between step 107 and the next step 108, the main board performs a special gaming state process when the extracted random number value is a specific value. In this special gaming state, the main board 409 does not rotate the left middle right reel for a predetermined period (freezes), and during that time, the rotation mode of at least one of the left reel, middle reel, and right reel is changed. Control different from the normal rotation mode, that is, an effect in reel rotation (reel special effect) is performed. The effect control board 510 performs a lottery process for providing a predetermined privilege different from the privilege of paying out the game medal based on the winning combination, generation of an effect image for the liquid crystal display device, etc. so as to be linked to the effect of the reel rotation. An effect control process is performed in a special game state. When the main board ends the special gaming state, the main board moves to Step 108.

  In the next step S108, it is determined whether or not the wait timer started in the previous start process (specifically, the game immediately before the game) has expired (for example, 4.1 seconds have elapsed). The timer called a wait timer measures the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) from the start of reel rotation in the game to the start of reel rotation in the next game. Is. Here, if the wait timer is timed up (4.1 seconds have already elapsed), this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S109. This determination loops until the wait timer times out.

  In step S109, rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is started. When the rotation speeds of all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c become constant, the operation enable lamps of the respective reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are turned on. By this lighting, the player knows that the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c has become effective.

  In the slot machine 1, the reel that has started to rotate continues to maintain the rotation at the above-described constant speed until a stop operation (pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c) by the player is accepted. .

  Next, in step S110, the wait timer is reset, and the wait timer is started until the next start process, and the start process ends.

[11-2. Internal lottery probability]
As described above, in the slot machine 1, the result of the internal lottery (the result of collating the extracted random number value) is allowed as a winning combination corresponding to the game (hereinafter referred to as a corresponding winning combination). If the winning combination is permitted, the condition device corresponding to the winning combination is activated, and the information of the activated condition device is processed as an information command indicating the result of the internal lottery (reel stop processing, Determination processing, payout processing, etc.).

  In the slot machine 1, a random value range (this is called an extraction range) for random number extraction is determined in advance. This extraction range can be determined as, for example, an integer value from 0 to 16383 (that is, 214 = 16384 random numbers). In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the random number value in the extraction range is set to 0 to 59999 for convenience, but it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to this. If this random number extraction range is expanded, the range of random values that can be extracted (so-called denominator) is increased, so that it is difficult to cause an event that specific random values are extracted in a biased manner.

  Within the above extraction range, random numbers corresponding to each winning combination are assigned in advance. For example, if the random value corresponding to RB2 is “1” among the random values in the extraction range (0 to 59999 in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment), the extracted random value is “1”. The result of the internal lottery is “RB 2 is won”, and the condition device of RB 2 is processed as an information command in the game. Further, when this is used, the winning probability of RB2 (probability that RB2 is selected as a result of internal lottery, lottery probability) can be calculated from the extraction range and the random value corresponding to RB2. In the above example (RB2), when the total number of random values corresponding to RB2 is divided by the total number of random values in the extraction range, the value becomes 2/60000, and the winning probability of RB2 is 1 / 30,000. It can be calculated.

  In this way, random numbers corresponding to all winning combinations are determined, and these random values are referred to as winning values corresponding to the respective winning combinations. In the above example (RB2), the random value “1” in the extraction range is the winning value corresponding to RB2. In addition, when there are a plurality of winning values, for example, if the winning value of a predetermined role is set to consecutive random values “1”, “2”, “3”, “4” within the extraction range, The range of values is a random value “1” to “4”. When it is determined that the extracted random number value corresponds to any of the random number values “1” to “4” (verified), the result of the internal lottery is “winning a predetermined role”. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to a single combination (for example, RB2, Bell 1, Bell 2, etc.) that is won only for one winning combination, a plurality of winning combinations (for example, “RB1 +”, for example) Watermelon ”,“ BB1 + Bell 2 ”, etc.) are prepared. Therefore, with respect to such a duplicated role, the winning value of the duplicated role is also included in the above-mentioned winning value.

  From this, the range of the winning value is determined for all winning combinations, and it is determined whether or not the extracted random number value falls within the winning range of any winning combination in the internal lottery. At this time, if the extracted random number value does not fall within the range of the winning value of any winning combination, it is lost. In other words, the range of the winning value of the lost game is other than the range of the winning value of all winning combinations. Note that the winning value may be referred to as a winning allowable value.

  By the way, a single combination corresponds to one winning combination corresponding to one extracted random value, and a duplicate combination refers to a plurality (in this case, two) winning combinations for one extracted random value. Corresponds. In other words, when the extracted random number value corresponds to the winning value of the duplicate combination, it means that any of the plurality of winning combinations has been won. For example, when the extracted random number value corresponds to the winning value corresponding to “SB1 + normal lip” shown in FIG. 49, the flag processing (see step S107 in FIG. 55) as shown in FIG. In addition, the condition device corresponding to SB1 and the condition device corresponding to normal replay are simultaneously established.

  Further, according to FIG. 49, during the bonus, the winning value of the ALL combination and the bonus game exclusive combination (logo 1 to logo 7) occupies most of the extraction range. Therefore, when the bonus game is executed, a large number of medals are paid out within the period during which the bonus game is executed.

  Further, as can be seen from FIG. 49, during the general state, during normal RT and during SB, there is a possibility of winning the single role of SB1, SB2 and SB3, as well as “SB1 + normal lip”, “SB2 + normal” The winning combination of SB and normal replay such as “Lip” and “SB3 + Normal Lip” is not won. On the other hand, during chance RT (chance RT1, chance RT2, chance RT3), although there is no possibility of winning a single role such as SB1, SB2 and SB3, "SB1 + normal lip", "SB2 + normal lip" and "SB3 + normal lip" There is a possibility of winning a duplicate combination of SB and normal replay. In addition, the probability of winning the single role of SB1, SB2 or SB3 during the general state, during normal RT and during SB is the overlap of “SB1 + normal lip”, “SB2 + normal lip” or “SB3 + normal lip” during chance RT The probability of winning a role is the same. That is, during chance RT, instead of the single role of SB1, SB2 and SB3 which may be won in the general state, normal RT and SB, "SB1 + normal lip", "SB2 + normal lip" and This means that there is a possibility of winning “SB3 + Normal Lip”.

  As described above, when “SB1 + normal lip”, “SB2 + normal lip” or “SB3 + normal lip” is won, it corresponds to the normal replay combination rather than the symbol combination corresponding to the SB combination (SB1, SB2, SB3). The reel stop process in step S is performed so that the symbol combination to be displayed is preferentially displayed on the active line. Here, since the replay symbols are arranged uniformly on the reels 301a to 301c within the range in which the reel pull-in can be controlled, the replay symbol corresponds to the normal replay role even though the normal replay role is won. The situation that the symbol combination to be displayed is not displayed on the active line (so-called missing) does not occur. Then, when “SB1 + normal lip”, “SB2 + normal lip” or “SB3 + normal lip” is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the normal replay combination is always displayed on the active line, even if the SB combination (SB1, SB, Even if SB2, SB3) have been won as a duplicate combination, the symbol combination corresponding to this SB combination cannot be displayed on the active line in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment.

[11-3. Game state transition]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a gaming state transition control process executed by the CPU 1110 mounted on the main board 409.

  First, it is determined whether or not a bonus game (BB1 game, BB2 game, RB1 game, RB2 game) is in progress (step S151), and when the bonus game is ended (YES in step S152), a transition is made to a general state ( Step S153). In this general state, when a game is executed over a certain period, the number of medals bet by a player to execute the game is larger than the number of medals paid out as a result of the game within the certain period. That is, the general state is a gaming state in which the number of medals decreases as the player executes the game.

  If it is determined in step S151 that the bonus game (BB1 game, BB2 game, RB1 game, RB2 game) is not in progress (NO in step S151), it is determined whether the bonus is in progress (step S154). That is, when a bonus combination (BB1, BB2, RB1, RB2) is won in the internal lottery, a condition device corresponding to the bonus combination is activated. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed on the effective line, it continues to operate until the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus winning combination is displayed on the effective line after the next game. When it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line (YES in step S155), the process proceeds to the bonus (step S156), and the bonus game is executed.

  If it is determined in step S154 that the bonus is not inside (NO in step S154), it is determined whether or not SB (SB1, SB2, SB3) is in progress (step S157). When the SB game is in progress, one SB game is executed, and when this SB game ends (YES in step S158), the game state is shifted to the original game state, that is, the game state immediately before the SB game is executed (step S159). .

  If it is determined in step S157 that SB is not in progress (NO in step S157), it is determined whether or not it is a chance RT (whether it is any one of chance RT1, chance RT2 and chance RT3) ( Step S160). When it is a chance RT (YES in step S160), it is determined whether or not it is a bonus, that is, whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line (step S161), and the symbol corresponding to the bonus combination is determined. If it is determined that the combination is displayed on the active line (YES in step S161), the bonus game is executed (step S156). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S161 that the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not displayed on the active line (NO in step S161), it is determined whether or not “bell bumps” are displayed on the active line. (Step S163). If it is determined that “bell bells” are displayed on the active line at this chance RT (YES in step S163), the routine proceeds to normal RT (step S164). Although not shown here, if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not displayed even though the bonus is won in the internal lottery, the game moves to the inside of the bonus and the SB is won in the internal lottery. In this case, the process proceeds to SB. The same applies to the normal RT and the general state described later.

  If it is determined in step S160 that it is not chance RT (chance RT1, chance RT2, chance RT3) (NO in step S160), it is determined whether or not it is normal RT (step S165). When it is normal RT (YES in step S165), it is determined whether or not it is a bonus, that is, whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line (step S166), and the symbol corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed. If it is determined that the combination is displayed on the active line (YES in step S166), the bonus game is executed (step S167). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S166 that the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not displayed on the active line (NO in step S166), it is determined whether or not the result of the internal lottery is ART replay (step S168). ). Here, when it is determined that the result of the internal lottery is ART replay (YES in step S168), the process shifts to chance RT regardless of whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to ART replay is displayed on the active line. (Step S169).

  In the internal lottery in normal RT, when the ART replay is won and the correct answer is made in the order of pressing (YES in step S168), the gaming state first shifts to chance ART1. Then, although not shown in FIG. 56, when the ART replay is won in the internal lottery in the chance ART1, and the pressing order of the reel stop button is correct, the gaming state shifts to the chance ART2. Further, although not shown in FIG. 56, when the ART replay is won in the internal lottery in the chance ART2, the main board is changed to a special gaming state (described later) that dramatically increases the number of continued games during the ART game. To migrate. When the ART replay is won in the internal lottery in the chance ART2, the main board may distribute the transition to the special gaming state and / or the transition to the gaming state of the chance ART3 based on the lottery result. These may be distributed according to the ART replay 1-3. Further, the main board may shift the gaming state from the chance ART1 to the chance ART3 when winning the ART replay in the internal lottery at the chance ART1. Even if the game state is controlled among the chance ART1, the chance ART2, and the chance ART3, the game state shifts to the normal RT when the “bell bump” is displayed on the active line.

  When it is determined in step S165 that it is not normal RT (NO in step S165), the gaming state is controlled to the general state. Even in this general state, it is determined whether or not it is a bonus, that is, whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line (step S170), and the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the effective line. If it is determined that it is displayed (YES in step S170), the process proceeds to a bonus (step S171), and a bonus game is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S170 that the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not displayed on the active line (NO in step S170), it is determined whether or not “bell bumps” are displayed on the active line. (Step S172). If it is determined in this general state that “bell bumps” are displayed on the active line (YES in step S172), the routine proceeds to normal RT (step S173).

  By the way, in the normal RT, as in the general state, when the game is executed for a certain period, the number of medals that the player wagers to execute the game within the certain period than the number of medals paid out as a result of the game. Will be more. That is, the normal RT is a gaming state in which the number of medals decreases along with the player executing a game, as in the general state.

  The probability that each winning combination wins in the internal lottery in each game state during the general state, normal RT, chance RT (chance RT1, chance RT2, chance RT3), SB, inside bonus, and bonus is shown in FIG. As shown in

  By the way, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the result information of the internal lottery is output from the main board 409 to the CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510 as an information command. The CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510 that has received the result information of the internal lottery output from the main board 409 includes means for executing an effect using, for example, the image display 500 or / and the speaker 512 based on the result information. . For example, in the chance RT, when the result of the internal lottery is any one of “AT1” to “AT10”, an appropriate pressing order for the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is, for example, the image display 500 or / and the speaker. It is clearly shown by the production using 512. As described above, when the result of the internal lottery is any one of “AT1” to “AT10”, an effect that clearly indicates to the player the proper pressing order of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is, for example, a general state. Or not normally RT. Accordingly, when the result of the internal lottery is any one of “AT1” to “AT10”, when the control is performed at the chance RT rather than when the control is performed at the general state or the normal RT, “AT1 It becomes easy for the player to display the symbol combinations corresponding to “AT10” on the active line. In this respect, the chance RT can be said to be a gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than the general state or the normal RT.

  Thus, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming machine is controlled to any one of the gaming states including the normal state (general state or normal RT) and the chance RT (chance RT1, chance RT2, chance RT3). .

  In the normal state described above, the internal lottery is performed as a single combination that is not selected at the same lottery time for the normal replay combination and the SB (SB1, SB2, SB3) combination. In the normal state, the loss is selected with a predetermined probability.

  In the chance RT (chance RT1, chance RT2, chance RT3), the probability of selecting the SB (SB1, SB2, SB3) combination is 200 / 60,000, which is the same probability as in the normal state. However, in the chance RT, the internal lottery is performed so that the normal replay combination and the SB combination are selected at the same lottery opportunity.

  That is, in the chance RT (chance RT1, chance RT2, chance RT3), the SB role and the normal replay role are selected at the same time instead of the SB (SB1, SB2, SB3) role that was only a single role in the normal state. Become a role. However, the normal replay combination that was a single combination in the normal state remains the single combination even in the chance RT. That is, in the chance RT, the probability that the normal replay combination is selected increases by the amount that the normal replay combination is selected in duplicate with the SB combination. In the chance RT2 of the chance RTs, a normal replay role is selected in place of the loss.

  Further, in this gaming machine, when an internal combination of the SB (SB1, SB2, SB3) and the normal replay combination is selected in the internal lottery at the chance RT, and the normal replay combination that does not overlap with the SB combination When the single role is selected, the stop control of the reels 301a to 301c in the rotation display state is performed so that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 1 condition device is displayed on the active line. Is called. Here, when a duplicate combination of the SB combination and the normal replay combination is selected, the symbol combination corresponding to the SB combination is not displayed, but winning the SB combination is an ART granting condition to be described later. Will satisfy the ART grant condition.

  In particular, when in the chance RT1, the loss probability is the same as in the normal state, so that the player feels that the expectation for winning the SB role and thus the frequency of satisfying the ART grant condition can be increased compared to the normal state. It becomes possible. Thereby, in chance RT1, it becomes possible to have an expectation as to whether or not the ART grant condition is satisfied, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, when in the chance RT2, all things that were lost in the general state, the normal RT and the chance RT1 become normal replays, and the SB (SB1, SB2, SB3) role and the normal replay role overlap, and Even if any of the normal replay combination (single combination) is selected by the internal lottery, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 1 condition device is displayed on the active line. Therefore, when winning the SB role is an ART granting condition to be described later, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 1 condition device is displayed on the active line, the player displays it on the active line. It is difficult to determine whether or not the ART granting condition is satisfied from the pattern combination mode.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in principle, even when the duplicate combination of the SB (SB1, SB2, SB3) combination and the normal replay combination is selected by the internal lottery, A symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination (single combination) (a symbol combination corresponding to the replay 1 condition device) is displayed on the active line. However, even when the duplicate combination of the SB combination and the normal replay combination is selected by internal lottery, when the specific condition is satisfied, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 1 is the best among the activated condition devices. Instead of reel control so that it is displayed on the effective line with priority, reel control is performed so that symbol combinations corresponding to other condition devices are displayed on the effective line with the highest priority.

  Specifically, when the combination selected in the internal lottery is “SB1 + normal lip” and the specific condition is satisfied, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 2 condition device among the activated condition devices is the most. The reel is controlled so that it is displayed on the active line with priority. In addition, when the specific condition is established when the winning combination selected by the internal lottery is “SB2 + normal lip” and “SB3 + normal lip”, the replay 3 condition device among the activated condition devices The reels are controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to is displayed on the active line with the highest priority.

  When the combination selected in the internal lottery is “SB1 + normal lip” and the specific condition is satisfied, among the activated condition devices, the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of SB1 has the highest priority. Next, the reel control may be performed so that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 2 condition device is preferentially displayed on the active line. Similarly, when a specific condition is satisfied when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is “SB2 + normal lip”, among the operated condition devices, the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of SB2 has the highest priority. Next, the reels may be controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 3 condition device is preferentially displayed on the active line, and the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is “SB3 + normal rep. When the specific condition is satisfied, the symbol combination corresponding to the SB3 condition device has the highest priority among the activated condition devices, and then the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 3 condition device is given priority. The reel may be controlled so as to be displayed on the effective line.

  By the way, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, it is set as said specific conditions that the reel stop buttons 211a-211c are operated by the proper pushing order. Specifically, when an overlapping combination of an SB (SB1, SB2, SB3) combination and a normal replay combination is selected in the internal lottery, “Left → Middle → Right” is pushed in order, “Left → Right → Middle scissors, middle → left → right middle press, middle → right → left middle press, right → left → middle reverse, and right → left → middle reverse scissors One of the six push orders is determined. When the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in the determined pressing order, the above-described specific condition is satisfied as if the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c were operated in an appropriate pressing order.

  In addition, when the overlapping combination of the SB (SB1, SB2, SB3) combination and the normal replay combination is selected by the internal lottery, it is determined to be any one of the above six pressing orders. However, the number of push orders determined is not limited to 1 and may be 2 or more.

  Needless to say, the specific condition is not limited to the operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c in an appropriate pushing order. For example, the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c may be stopped so that at least one reel or all of the three reels 301a to 301c are stopped at an appropriate timing.

  By the way, neither the SB (SB1, SB2, SB3) combination nor the normal replay combination is carried over until the next game is established. Therefore, even if the winning combination of the SB combination and the normal replay combination is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the normal replay is displayed in the current game, the SB combination will be supported unless the SB combination is won again after the next game. Since the symbol combination cannot be displayed on the active line, if the above-mentioned specific condition is not satisfied, whether the result of the internal lottery was a duplicate role of the SB role and the normal replay role is simply a single role It is not immediately recognized by the player whether it was a normal replay role. Therefore, if the winning combination of the SB role and the normal replay is won in the internal lottery, the above-mentioned overlapping role is won in the internal lottery until the ART game is actually executed after the winning game. Even if it is not, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation given to the player by performing various expected effects at any time, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the chance RT2 of the chance RT, a normal replay combination is selected instead of the loss. That is, all the extracted random numbers that were lost in the normal state are used as a normal replay role, and the probability of the loss is 0. Further, for the SB (SB1, SB2, SB3) combination, although the winning probability is 600/6000 which is the same as the normal state, it is an overlapping combination of the SB combination and the normal replay combination. That is, in this chance RT2, the normal state (general state, normal RT) or the loss in chance RT1 is won in the normal replay role instead of this loss.

  Also in this chance RT2, instead of the SB (SB1, SB2, SB3) combination that was a single combination in the normal state, the SB combination and the normal replay combination are duplicated combinations that are simultaneously selected in the same lottery opportunity. However, the normal replay role that was a single role in the normal state remains the single role in the chance RT2, and further, the normal replay role is the amount that was lost in the normal state. Therefore, in this chance RT2, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the normal replay combination is displayed, the appearance frequency is extremely high (in this embodiment, the probability of losing is 50% or more). Unlike the case of chance RT1, even if a symbol combination corresponding to a duplicate role and thus a normal replay role is displayed, the SB (SB1, SB2, SB3) role and the normal replay role are simultaneously selected in the same lottery opportunity. The expectation for what has been done is sparse. Thereby, in chance RT2, it can be made difficult to grasp | ascertain whether the ART grant lottery was performed from the combination of the symbols when the plurality of reels 301a to 301c are stopped. As a result, for example, in the case of performing an effect that clearly indicates to the player that an ART grant lottery is performed or that an ART grant lottery may have been won, a plurality of reels 301a to 301c are stopped. Since it is difficult to grasp whether or not the ART grant lottery has been performed from the combination of symbols at the time, the effect can be interesting.

[11-3-1. Chance RT]
In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, as described above, when the ART replay is won in the internal lottery in the normal RT, the chance RT is started from the next game.

  Here, the chance RT is a game during the game period from the start of the chance RT until the “bell bumps” are displayed on the active line. This chance RT can also be seen from FIG. Thus, the winning probability of replay is made easier to win than the general state. In the chance RT, the CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510 performs, for example, the image display body 500 and / or the speaker in order to avoid displaying “bell bumps” on the active line for a certain number of games. An effect using 512 is executed. That is, when the result of the internal lottery is any one of “AT1” to “AT10”, the reel stop buttons 211a to 211b in the proper pushing order are set so that “bell bells” are not displayed on the active line. An effect that prompts the user to operate 211c or an effect that prompts the user to operate the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c at an appropriate timing is executed. By operating the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c based on the effects urged in this way, the chance RT can be continued for a certain number of games. Then, when a certain number of games have been executed, the effect for preventing “bell bells” from being displayed on the active line is completed. As a result, any one of “AT1” to “AT10” is won in the internal lottery, “Bell Kobo-me” is displayed on the active line, and the chance RT ends.

  Further, during the chance RT, the game is executed in a manner that allows the player to recognize (identify) that the gaming state is during the chance RT. Specifically, it is possible to identify by chance RT display (by the image display body 500 or the like) or sound effects (by the speaker 512 or the like).

  The slot machine 1 is provided with a plurality of setting values (four stages from setting values 1 to 4) (each not shown). In each set value, a difference (step difference, extreme difference, etc.) is given to the internal lottery probability. This set value may be such that the bonus winning combination or the internal lottery probability of ART replay is preferentially increased as the set value becomes higher, such as set value 1 <set value 2 <set value 3 <set value 4. For example, compared to the set value 1, the set value 4 has a high probability of winning BB1, so the possibility of winning BB1 is high. By providing stepwise set values in this way, the slot machine 1 can be used as a clue when the player guesses the set value by giving a characteristic to each set value or according to the management of the hall or the like. Can be operated. The setting value is not limited to the above.

[11-4. Reel stop processing]
When the start-up process is completed, an operation for stopping a reel that continues to rotate at a constant speed (stop operation, that is, pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c) is waited. FIG. 57 shows the contents of reel stop processing by the “table method” as an example. Hereinafter, the flow of the reel stop control process will be described.

  In the reel stop process, first, in step S201, a reel stop control table is selected in accordance with a condition device that operates in accordance with the result of the internal lottery in the game. This reel stop control table is prepared in advance with patterns corresponding to all the condition devices in a one-to-one correspondence, and these are stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409 as read-only table data.

  When the reel stop control table is selected based on the conditional device established in step S201 described above, it enters a standby state until a pressing operation of each reel stop button 211a, 211b, 211c is accepted (step S202). , S210, S217). In these standby states, whether each of the left reel 301a, middle reel 301b, and right reel 301c has already stopped, or the first reel stop flag is not ON (F = 0, that is, OFF) It is also determined whether any one of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is pressed. Until all the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are pressed, the determination in step S209 is not satisfied, and the processes in and after step S202 are repeated.

  Here, the order in which the pressing operations of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are received (stop operation procedure) is a stop operation procedure (or pressing sequence) called “forward press”, “reverse press”, and “middle press”, respectively. Say).

The above-described “forward press” stop operation procedure refers to an operation procedure for stopping the left reel 301a first (that is, a procedure for pressing the left reel stop button 211a first). From the reel operation order to stop after
[Left reel → Middle reel → Right reel],
Or
It is further divided into two stop operation procedures: [Left reel → Right reel → Middle reel]. These two are collectively referred to as “forward push”. Note that the latter stop operation procedure is sometimes called “scissor push”.

The above-described “reverse push” stop operation procedure is an operation procedure in which the right reel 301c is stopped first as opposed to “forward push” (that is, a procedure in which the right reel stop button 211c is pressed first). From the operation order of the reels to be stopped after the second,
[Right reel-> middle reel-> left reel]
Or
It is further divided into two stop operation procedures: [Right reel → Left reel → Middle reel]. These two are collectively referred to as “reverse pressing”. Note that the latter stop operation procedure is sometimes called “reverse scissor pressing”.

The above-mentioned “middle push” stop operation procedure refers to an operation procedure for stopping the middle reel 301b first (that is, a procedure for pressing the middle reel stop button 211b first). From the operation order of reels to be stopped later,
[Center reel → Left reel → Right reel],
Or
The operation is further divided into two stop operation procedures [middle reel → right reel → left reel]. These two are collectively referred to as “middle press”.

  In step S202, it is determined whether the flag indicating that the left reel 301a has been stopped (the left reel stop flag LF) is OFF (LF = 0), and the pressing operation of the left reel stop button 211a has been accepted. To do. If it is assumed in step S201 that the left reel stop button 211a is first pressed (first) in accordance with the “forward press” stop operation procedure from the standby state of the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c, step S202 is performed. The determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to Step S203.

  In step S203, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0). The “first reel” as used herein refers to a reel that receives a stop operation first or stops first. In this example (“forward press”), the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0) because the stop operation of the left reel 301a is accepted first. Therefore, the determination at step S203 is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next step S204.

  In the next step S204, a first reel stop process is performed on the left reel 301a. In this first reel stop process, control of the stop position of the winning symbol corresponding to the internal lottery flag is executed based on the reel stop control table corresponding to the operating condition device.

  In step S206, the reel stop control table for the remaining middle reel 301b and right reel 301c is determined. As described above, since the slot machine 1 has only two effective lines, a right-up line and a right-down line, there is only one stop control table for the remaining reels (the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c) at this time. Can be determined. That is, among the symbols in the symbol display window 401 of the first stop reel (in this case, the left reel 301a) (this is referred to as a stop eye, the same applies hereinafter), the symbol at the upper or lower position can be the winning combination symbol. If the symbol has a characteristic, a reel stop control table is selected that can align the corresponding winning symbol of the remaining reels (the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c) on the effective line based on the symbol. It will be.

  In step S207, the first reel stop flag is set to ON (F = 1), and the process proceeds to next step S208.

  Next, in step S208, the left reel stop flag LF is set to ON (LF = 1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

  In step S209, it is determined whether all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped. In this example, the left reel stop flag LF has only been turned ON, and the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c are still rotating. Therefore, this determination is not satisfied, and the processing returns to step S202 and the subsequent processing is repeated. Run.

  Then, when the processing from step S202 is executed again, the left reel 301a is already in the stopped state, so the determination in step S202 is not satisfied, and the routine goes to step S210.

  In step S210, it is determined whether or not the flag indicating that the middle reel 301b has been stopped (the middle reel stop flag MF) is OFF (MF = 0) and that the pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 211b has been accepted. To do. Here, in order to follow the stop operation procedure of “forward press”, the pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 211b is accepted. Therefore, the determination at step S210 is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next step S211.

In step S211, the first reel stop flag is set to OF as in step S203 above.
It is determined whether F (F = 0). At this time, since the first reel stop flag is already ON (F = 1), this determination is not satisfied, and the routine goes to Step S213.

  In step S213, as the middle reel stop process, control of the stop position of the winning winning symbol based on the reel control table corresponding to the operating condition device (in this case, the reel stop control table determined in step S206 above). Execute. At this time, the middle reel 301b becomes the second stopped reel (second reel), and steps S212, S214, and S215 are all bypassed, and the process proceeds to step S216, where the middle reel stop flag MF is turned on (MF = 1). Then, the process proceeds to step S209.

  In step S209, the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are only stopped, and the right reel 301c is still rotating and is in a stopped state (the right reel stop flag RF is OFF). Therefore, this determination is not satisfied, and the process returns to step S202, and the subsequent processing is repeated.

  Further, in the processing after step S202 for the third time, it is first determined in step S217 whether the right reel stop flag MF is OFF (MF = 0) and the pressing operation of the right reel stop button 211c is accepted. However, the subsequent processes in steps S218 and S220 are the same as the processes in steps S210 and subsequent steps (steps S211 and S213), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In step S223, the right reel stop flag RF is set to ON (MF = 1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

  Finally, in step S209, since all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are in a stopped state at this time, this determination is satisfied, and the reel stop process ends.

  In the case of the “middle press” stop operation procedure, the same description as above can be made, and the details are omitted. However, since the “reverse pressing” stop operation procedure is partially different from the above description, it will be described below.

  The “reverse push” stop operation procedure differs from the “forward push” or “middle push” stop operation procedure described above in step S221 (determination of the remaining reel stop control table after the first reel stop process). is there. That is, in the “reverse push” stop operation procedure, only the right reel 301c is stopped, and if there is any winning symbol in the lower position among the stops of the right reel 301c, there are still two valid It is possible to arrange the winning winning symbols in any of the lines. Therefore, at the stage of step S221, a plurality of reel stop control tables capable of aligning the corresponding winning combination symbols on any active line are prepared, and any one may be selected.

[11-4-1. Reel stop control]
In the reel stop process described above, reel stop control for drawing the winning symbol (corresponding winning symbol) corresponding to the establishment flag into the symbol display window 401 as much as possible (so-called pull-in control) is performed. Specifically, when a player's reel stop operation is accepted, a range that can be stopped in the symbol display window 401 (a range in which the corresponding winning symbol can be drawn, for example, four symbols). Minutes) is determined in advance, and if the corresponding winning combination symbol is within the range, control is performed to pull the symbol into the symbol display window 401 and stop the reel. The “retractable range” here refers to the maximum number of symbols that can be moved in the rotation direction of the reel from when the reel stop operation is accepted until the reel stops. Say. For example, if the pullable range is a maximum of 4 symbols, when a reel stop operation is accepted, the reel can be further rotated up to 4 symbols based on the position.

  Therefore, according to such reel stop control, even if there is no corresponding winning symbol in the symbol display window 401 at the time when the reel stop operation is received, the corresponding winning symbol is within the range that can be drawn. If there is, the winning winning symbol can be moved to the symbol display window 401 and stopped. In addition, by performing this pull-in control, even if the player is slightly ahead of the winning winning symbol, if the winning winning symbol is within the pullable range, the winning symbol is displayed as a symbol. It can be pulled into the window 401 and stopped. Therefore, it is possible to suppress as much as possible the occurrence of losing (the winning bonus cannot be obtained and the gaming bonus corresponding to the winning bonus cannot be acquired and the gaming bonus disappears).

  In the slot machine 1, when the condition device corresponding to the normal replay role, the bell 1, the bell 2, the ALL role, etc. is operating, it is necessary to align the corresponding winning symbol without requiring the player's attention. (See FIG. 46 described above). This is because, for the symbols constituting the symbol combinations corresponding to the normal replay role, bell 1, bell 2, ALL role, etc., the corresponding winning symbol symbols are arranged every four symbols at the maximum. Because.

  Further attention is paid to the replay symbols. On the left reel 301a, a maximum of four other symbols are arranged between the replay symbols and the replay symbols (see FIG. 46). As a result, in the left reel 301a, regardless of the position of the reel at which the stop operation is accepted, as long as the condition device corresponding to the replay function is operating, the replay symbol is always drawn to any point on the active line and stopped. be able to.

  Further, when the result of the internal lottery is a double combination of a bonus combination and a small combination, the small combination is preferentially drawn over the bonus symbol. If a winning combination of a bonus combination and a small combination is won, even if a symbol combination corresponding to the small combination is displayed in the winning game, a combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination will be displayed in the next game or later. It is.

  The above is an example of the reel stop process by the table method. In addition to this, there is a reel stop process by a control method, but since a known process can be applied to this, a specific description is omitted here. In the present embodiment, either the control method or the table method of reel stop processing may be executed, and which method is adopted may be appropriately determined when the control program is constructed.

[11-5. Determination process]
When the reel stop process is completed, whether or not the winning combination symbols are aligned on any active line in the symbol display window 401 (whether a combination mode of symbols corresponding to any winning combination is displayed) or not. Make a decision. In FIG. 58, the content of this determination process is demonstrated concretely.

  When all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped by the reel stop process, the winning combination symbols are arranged on any of the effective lines from the stop eye form in the symbol display window 401 (corresponding to the winning combination) It is determined whether or not a combination mode of symbols to be displayed is displayed). It should be noted that the stop eye particularly when all the reels are in a stopped state is sometimes referred to as an outcome.

  In steps S301, S302, and S303, it is determined whether the SB game is being played, the RB game is being played, or the BB game is being played. This is to determine the ON state (= 1) and OFF state (= 0) of the game state flags of the SB in-progress flag, the RB game in-progress flag, and the BB game in-progress flag.

  If the SB flag is ON (= 1), the determination at Step S301 is satisfied, and the routine goes to Step S390. Similarly, if the RB game flag is ON (= 1), the determination at step S302 is satisfied, and the routine goes to step S380. If the BB game flag is ON (= 1), the determination at step S303 is satisfied, and the routine goes to step S370.

  If all of the SB in-progress flag, the RB game in-progress flag, and the BB game in-progress flag are OFF (= 0), the determinations in steps S301, S302, and S303 are not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S304.

  After executing the RT game end determination process (details will be described later) in step S304, the following steps S310, S320, S330, S340, S350 are further performed in accordance with the winning combination symbols arranged on any active line. Move to one of the following.

  In step S310, it is determined whether BB symbols are available. When the BB symbols are aligned on any active line (“red 7 symbol-red 7 symbol-red 7 symbol”), this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next step S312.

  In the next step S312, a BB game start process is executed. Here, as a BB game, a process for concentrating and playing a plurality of games where medals can be easily obtained is performed (details will be described later).

  In step S320, it is determined whether RB symbols are available. If RB symbols are aligned on any of the active lines (“white 7 symbol-red 7 symbol-red 7 symbol”), this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next step S322.

  In the next step S322, an RB game start process is executed. Here, as an RB game, a process for concentrating and playing a plurality of games in which medals can be easily obtained according to the BB game is performed (details will be described later).

  In step S330, it is determined whether the symbol combinations corresponding to the SB combination (SB1, SB2, SB3) are available. If there is a symbol combination corresponding to the SB combination on any active line, this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S332.

  In the next step S332, an SB game start process is executed. Here, as the SB game, only the next game after the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the SB role is displayed on the active line, the game is concentrated multiple times that makes it easy to obtain medals according to the winning probability for the winning role. Thus, processing for performing the processing is performed (details will be described later). Note that the CRB game start process in step S332 corresponds to the forced winning game state start means described in the solution means.

  In step S340, it is determined whether replay symbols are available. When the replay symbols are aligned on any of the active lines (“Ripbell symbol-Replay symbol-Replay symbol”), this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S342.

  In the next step S342, a replay game process is executed. In this replay game process, the MAX bet command is temporarily stored in the RAM 1114 in order to start the next game with the same bet number (MAX bet in this example) as the bet number in the game. Based on this command, the next game can be started as a replay.

  In step S344, the replay winning flag is set to OFF (= 0), and the process ends.

  In step S350, it is determined whether the small role symbols are available. If the small combination symbols are aligned on any active line, this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S352.

  In the next step S352, a prescribed number of medals are paid out in accordance with the arranged small role symbols (a prescribed number of medals are paid out from the medal releasing device 110). Then, the medal payout number is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612). Thereby, the player is notified (notified and displayed) that the prescribed number of medals corresponding to the small role has been paid out.

  In step S354, the corresponding small role winning flag is set to OFF (= 0), and the process ends.

  If none of the winning combination symbols are present on the active line, none of the determinations in steps S310, S320, S330, S340, and S350 is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S360. Note that the outcome at this time is also referred to as “losing eye (disjoint pattern combination mode)”.

  In step S360, a losing process is executed. In this losing process, when the winning flag that is ON (= 1) at this time is a winning flag other than BB and RB, the winning flag is turned OFF (= 0). If none of the winning flags is ON (= 1) (in this case, the loss flag is ON (= 1)), the loss flag is turned OFF (= 0).

  The processing from step S304 to step S360 described above is processing that is executed in the general state, normal RT. Next, the processing after step S370 will be described. This process is a process executed in the case of a BB game (BB1 game, BB2 game), an RB game (RB1 game, RB2 game), and an SB game (SB1 game, SB game, SB3 game).

  First, in step S370, it is determined whether or not the BB game payout symbols are available. The “BB game payout combination” here is a general term for the ALL combination and the bonus game exclusive combination. Then, when the BB game payout symbols are aligned on any active line, this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S372.

  In the next step S372, a prescribed number of medals are paid out in accordance with the BB game payout symbols that have been prepared (a prescribed number of medals are paid out from the medal releasing device 110). Then, the number of medals to be paid out is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612), so that the player is notified (notification, display) that the prescribed number of medals corresponding to the BB game payout combination has been paid out. )

  Subsequent to step S372, in step S374, a BB game end determination process is executed (details will be described later). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S376, and RT game start processing (details will be described later) is executed.

  If the determination in step S370 is not satisfied, the process moves to step 378, and the establishment flag is turned OFF (= 0). In particular, in this example, since no omission occurs, the lost flag corresponds to the establishment flag. That is, in step S378, the loss flag is turned OFF (= 0).

  Next, step S380 and subsequent steps will be described. In step S380, it is determined whether or not the RB game payout symbols are available. The “RB game payout” is also a collective term for the winning combination having a payout during the RB game, as in the above-mentioned BB game payout. In this embodiment, the same as the “BB game payout”. It is. If there are RB game payout symbols on any active line, this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S382.

  In the next step S382, a predetermined number of medals are paid out in accordance with the RB game payout symbols that have been prepared (a predetermined number of medals are paid out from the medal releasing device 110). Then, the number of medals to be paid out is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612), so that the player is notified (notification, display) that the prescribed number of medals corresponding to the RB game payout combination has been paid out. )

  Following step S382, in step S384, an RB game end determination process is executed (details will be described later). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S386, and RT game start processing (details will be described later) is executed.

  If the determination in step S380 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step 378 described above, and the establishment flag is turned OFF (= 0). Since this was demonstrated previously, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Next, step S390 and subsequent steps will be described. In step S390, it is determined whether or not the SB game payout symbols are available. This “SB game payout” is also a collective term for winning combinations that have a payout during the SB game. If there are SB game payout symbols on any active line, this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S392.

  In the next step S392, a predetermined number of medals are paid out according to the SB game payout symbols that have been prepared (a predetermined number of medals are paid out from the medal releasing device 110). Then, the number of medals to be paid out is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612), so that the player is notified (notification, display) that the prescribed number of medals corresponding to the payout at the time of the SB game has been paid out. )

  Following step S392, in step S394, a CRB game end determination process is executed (details will be described later). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S386, and RT game start processing (details will be described later) is executed.

  If the determination in step S390 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step 396, and the establishment flag is turned OFF (= 0). Since this is the same content as step S378 described above, description thereof is omitted.

[11-5-1. BB game start process]
If the determination in step S310 of FIG. 58 is satisfied, the BB game start process is executed. This BB game start process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S401, it is determined whether the BB flag (BB1 flag, BB2 flag) is ON (= 1). When the determination in step S401 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S404. In step S404, the BB game flag is set to ON (= 1). Although not shown, the BB flag is turned OFF (= 0) at this time. Next, in step S406, the cumulative payout number count during the BB game is cleared. Thereby, accumulation of the cumulative payout number is executed from the next game. From the next game, the BB game is started with the same bet number of 3 bets (3 bets) as in the normal game.

  If the determination in step S401 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S402 and error processing is executed. Such a case corresponds to a case where the BB symbols are aligned even though the BB flag is OFF (= 0). In other words, this may occur when any illegal means (for example, goto action) is performed or when a failure occurs in the slot machine 1. Accordingly, in the error processing, the error lamp 604 is turned on, and other indications are made to notify the occurrence of an error to the above-described LED or the like.

[11-5-2. BB game end determination process]
Next, the BB game end determination process in step S374 of FIG. 58 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S451, in response to the payout of medals in step S372 of FIG. 58 described above, the payout number of the game is added to the cumulative payout number in the BB game.

  Next, in step S452, it is determined whether the cumulative payout number has exceeded 300 (200 in the case of BB2). If the determination in step S452 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S454, where the cumulative payout number during the BB game is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612, etc. Note that the cumulative payout number is provided with a display LED or the like separately. It may be displayed on this). If the determination in step S452 is satisfied, the process moves to step S460.

  In step S460, after the BB game flag is turned OFF (= 0), the CRT game start flag is turned ON (= 1) in step S462, and the process is ended.

[11-5-3. RB game start processing]
If the determination in step S320 of FIG. 58 is satisfied, an RB game start process is executed. This RB game start process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S501, it is determined whether the RB flag is ON (= 1). When the determination in step S501 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S504. In step S504, the RB game flag is set to ON (= 1). Although not shown, the RB flag is turned OFF (= 0) at this time. In step S506, the cumulative payout number count during the RB game is cleared. Thereby, accumulation of the cumulative payout number is executed from the next game. From the next game, the RB game is started with the same bet number of 3 bets (3 bets) as in the normal game. As a result, the player can play the game without feeling special discomfort compared to the normal game.

  If the determination in step S501 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S502, and error processing is executed. Such a case corresponds to a case where RB symbols are aligned even though the RB flag is OFF (= 0). In other words, this may occur when any illegal means (for example, goto action) is performed or when a failure occurs in the slot machine 1. Accordingly, in the error processing, the error lamp 604 is turned on, and other indications are made to notify the occurrence of an error to the above-described LED or the like.

[11-5-4. RB game end determination process]
Next, the RB game end determination process in step S384 of FIG. 58 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S551, in response to the payout of medals in step S382 of FIG. 58 described above, the payout number of the game is added to the cumulative payout number in the RB game.

  Next, in step S552, it is determined whether the cumulative payout number exceeds 20. If the determination in step S552 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S554 to display the cumulative payout number in the RB game (displayed on the payout number display LED 612. The cumulative payout number is provided with a display LED or the like separately. It may be displayed on this).

  If the determination in step S552 is satisfied, the process moves to step S556.

  In step S556, after the RB game flag is turned OFF (= 0), the LRT game start flag is turned ON (= 1) in step S558, and the process is ended.

[11-5-5. ART game start processing]
The ART game is a game executed in the chance RT, and is executed when the ART replay is won in the normal RT (the game state shifts to the chance RT) and the ART grant lottery is further won.

  The ART grant lottery is performed based on a predetermined condition being satisfied. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, one of the predetermined conditions is that the result of the internal lottery is SB combination (SB1, SB2, SB3). That is, the ART grant lottery is performed based on the result of the internal lottery being the SB combination. If the ART grant lottery is won, it is determined which of the SART game and the LART game is to be executed. The ART grant lottery is not only performed when the result of the internal lottery is a single role of the SB role (SB1, SB2, SB3), but also a duplicate role with the normal replay (“SB1 + normal lip”, “SB2 + normal lip”, It is also performed when “SB3 + normal lip”).

  By the way, as described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if the result of the internal lottery is an overlapping role of the SB (SB1, SB2, SB3) role and the normal replay role, unless a specific condition is satisfied. The symbol combination corresponding to the normal replay combination (single combination) (the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 1 condition device) is displayed on the active line. Therefore, if the gaming state is a gaming state where there is no losing, such as chance RT2 or chance RT3, or if the gaming state has a low probability even if there is a losing, whether or not an ART grant lottery has been performed is determined. It is difficult to grasp from the pattern combination displayed on the effective line. However, when the specific condition is satisfied, as described above, the replay 1 and the replay are more than the symbol combination corresponding to the normal replay combination (single combination) (the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 1 condition device). The reel control is performed so that a symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of 2, SB1, SB2, or SB3 is preferentially displayed on the effective line. Thus, in chance RT2, it is difficult in principle for a player to grasp whether or not an ART grant lottery is performed from the pattern combination displayed on the active line, but the specific condition is Only when it is established, it is possible to grasp whether or not the ART grant lottery is performed from the pattern combination displayed on the active line. Therefore, the player operates the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c in hope of being operated in an appropriate pressing order at the chance RT2, and the operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c can be interesting. It becomes. In particular, even if the result of the internal lottery is a duplicate role, since it is a duplicate role of the SB (SB1, SB2, SB3) role and the normal replay role that will not bring the game result after the next game, The number of games that can be determined whether or not to be played is limited to one game.

  As described above, it is determined that which of the SART game and the LART game is executed when the ART grant lottery is won, but the SART game is an ART game in which, for example, 50 games are set, The LART game is an ART game in which, for example, 4000 games are set as one set.

  When an ART grant lottery is won once, a set of ART games is executed. When an ART grant lottery is performed during the ART game, one set of ART games is added each time the ART grant lottery is won. The ART game is continued until all of the added number of ART games are consumed. Hereinafter, the ART game start process will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S801, it is determined whether the SART game start flag is ON (= 1). If this determination is satisfied, the number of SART games is set to “50” in step S802.

  In the next step S804, the SART game flag is set to ON (= 1). Although not shown, the SART game start flag is turned OFF (= 0) at this time. Thereby, the SART game is started from the next game.

  On the other hand, if the determination in step S801 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S810 to determine whether the LART game start flag is ON (= 1). If this determination is satisfied, the number of LART games is set to “4000 times” in step S812.

  In the next step S814, the LART game flag is set to ON (= 1). Although not shown, at this time, the LART game start flag is turned OFF (= 0). Thereby, the LART game is started from the next game.

  If none of the determinations in steps S801 and S810 is satisfied, the process ends without performing any process.

[11-5-6. ART game end determination process]
Next, the ART game end determination process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In the above-described determination process of FIG. 58, when “bell bumps” are displayed on the active line, when the set number of ART games has been executed, the ART game end determination process is executed.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether an ART game flag (SART game flag or LART game flag) is ON (= 1). If this determination is not satisfied, no processing is performed and the process ends.

  When the determination in step S901 is satisfied, in the next step S902, the number of ART games is subtracted by “1”, and the process proceeds to step S904.

  In step S904, it is determined whether the remaining number of RT games is “0”. If the number of ART games is “0”, this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S906, where the ART game flag (SART game flag or LART game flag) is turned OFF (= 0).

  On the other hand, if the determination in step S904 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S910, and it is determined whether or not “bell bumps” are displayed on the active line.

  When the determination in step S910 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S906, where the ART game in-progress flag is set to OFF (= 0) and the process ends.

  If the determination in step S910 is not satisfied, the process ends.

[11-6. Control of production operation]
The above is an example of control by the main board 409, but in the slot machine 1, various effect operations are controlled by the effect control board 510 as the game progresses. This is executed by the effect control board 510 (mainly the CPU 1118) based on various commands (information command, output signal) output from the main board 409. As described above, various commands output from the main board 449 are temporarily stored in the RAM 1122. Then, based on the command, an effect mode prepared in advance is selected and executed. Such effect modes are stored in the ROM 1120 as an effect mode data table (not shown), and a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the command are prepared.

  For example, the production mode includes a game completed only by the game (hereinafter referred to as a single production mode), a game performed over a plurality of games (hereinafter referred to as a continuous production mode), and the like. Among these, the single-shot effect mode includes an effect that suggests the winning flag (implying effect, notification effect, details will be described later), an effect that informs the payout of medals (it may be an aspect that notifies the payout appearance and the number of payouts). There is.

  The suggestion effect is different from the effect (notification effect) that directly informs the player of the winning flag, that is, an effect that indirectly informs the winning flag, for example, the form of the winning combination corresponding to the winning flag. In other words, a display that expresses a color or the like is performed. The suggestion effect is also performed when the winning flag is not present (that is, when the game is lost). In this case, it is set as an effect of content that is difficult to notice that it is a loss (for example, ambiguous content that can be taken with any winning combination). Thereby, it can be made difficult for the player to notice that the game is lost.

  For example, when the winning flag is BB, the notice effect can clearly know which winning combination the player has won in the game, such as “bonus confirmed!”. This effect is more effective when executed for a winning combination (because a large amount of medals can be acquired) such as BB and RB that are pleasing to the player. That is, when a player wins BB or the like, it is possible to give a meaning to congratulate them.

  In addition, as a continuous effect mode, there are those corresponding to game states such as a general state, a normal RT, a chance RT, and a bonus. These are clarifications about the gaming state, and the player has a chance to determine whether the current gaming state is in normal RT, for example, by performing these effects (continuous effects). It becomes easy to distinguish whether it is during RT.

  During the ART game, a continuous effect is executed from the start to the end so that the player can recognize that fact. For example, a display for counting the number of times of the SART game, or a sound effect that gives a sense of crisis as the specified number of times is approached. In this way, the player can proceed with the game while checking how many remaining SART games there are.

  In the LART game, the continuous effect may be executed, but the count display of the number of times of the LART game may not be particularly performed. This is because there is almost no need to worry about the end of the specified number of times because the game period is considerably long as viewed from the player with 4000 LART games. For example, if the player does not know the specified number of times of the LART game, the ART game can be continued without being sure how long the ART game (LART game) will continue. The effect that can be produced.

  The effect modes described above can be executed as image display by the image display body 500, generation of sound effects by the speaker 512 or the like, light emission or lighting by LED decoration or the like. Such a production mode can make it difficult to give a boring impression when the player continues the game for a long time. The production mode is not limited to being executed by the image display body 500, the speaker 512, the LED decoration, or the like. For example, instead of the image display body 500, an EL display (Electroluminescence Display) or a dot LED may be used. Furthermore, dolls imitating characters, movable models, etc., and side reels (for example, they are placed at different positions from each reel, and can be started and stopped regardless of player operations as part of the production. It is also possible to provide various effects by providing illumination such as a lamp (for example, a rotatable light represented by a rotating lamp). By adopting such a method, it is possible to sufficiently entertain the player without using a liquid crystal display or the like.

  Next, the special game state will be described. As described above, the special gaming state is a gaming state in which the number of continuing games of the ART game can be increased during the ART game. In the special game state, the main board performs special effect processing (described later) for reel rotation control, and the effect control board performs processing for adding the number of continued games of the ART game in accordance with the reel special effect processing. First, the transition opportunity to the special game state will be described. In the normal RT gaming state, for example, when the winning combination of ART replay is established and the correct answer is made in the push order, and the ART grant lottery is won, the main board 409 changes the normal RT to the chance RT1 (preparation state of the chance RT2 which is an ART game) ). When the main board wins the ART replay in the gaming state of the chance RT1, and the reel stop button is operated according to the instruction of the pushing order by the production control board and corrects the pushing order of the ART replay, the gaming state of the chance RT1 is changed to the chance RT2 The game state (ART game: for example, the aforementioned LART game or SART game) is shifted to.

  When the main board is in the gaming state of the chance RT2, any of the ART replays 1 to 3 as the specific combination or that the specific ART replay is won (or the order of pressing the reel stop buttons is correct) ), The special game state is started while maintaining the game state in the chance RT2, and the effect control board also receives the command from the main board and starts the special game state. As described above, the place gaming state won for the ART replay by the internal lottery at the chance RT2 shifts to the chance RT3, but as described here, the special gaming state is started without shifting to the chance RT3. The However, the chance RT2 may be shifted to the chance RT3, and the state of the chance RT3 may be shifted to the special game state. Advantages when shifting from the chance RT3 to the special gaming state will be described later. Further, it is possible to shift from the chance RT1 to the chance RT3 and shift to the special gaming state.

  This special gaming state is managed in a mode different from the number of games of chance RT2, and ends when the prescribed number of games is exhausted or the bells of the pushing order bell (AT1-AT10). The special game state is a game zone that gives the player a chance to increase the number of continued games of the ART game, and the effect control board does not subtract the number of remaining games of the ART game during the duration of the special game state. There is a special gaming state (described later) in which the effect control board can dramatically increase the number of continued ART games during the special gaming state. When the special game state ends, the main board returns the game state to a game state (chance ART2) in which no special reel effect is performed. The effect control board executes an effect for notifying the player of the transition to the special game state due to the winning of the ART replay. Although the end of the special gaming state is the digestion of the specified number of games or the bell bumps, it may be triggered by a part of the replay (for example, normal replay + falling lottery by the effect control board). As a result, the frequency at which replays are displayed is high, and a tension is created that the player does not know when the special game will end.

  Conventionally, since there are many gaming machines that have transitioned to special gaming state or transition lottery based on small roles with low winning probability, there are few timings that can be expected in special gaming state because the winning probability is low It was a thing. This time, ART replay which is one of the triggers of special gaming state is the same pattern as normal replay, so the player does not know whether ART replay is won or normal replay (the order of push is not displayed in ART replay) Or if the push order is displayed in normal replay). Even if the normal replay is won, the timing at which the special game state can be expected with high frequency can be generated from the expectation that the ART replay is won or not. On the other hand, it is possible to make the player think that it may be a normal replay despite being elected to ART replay, so that the player is surprised by suddenly changing to the special game state. You can also. Although the transition to the special game state is triggered by the winning of the ART replay, for example, a special game state transition lottery may be performed on the effect control board side with all winning combinations including a loss. When the winning combination is lost and the transition lottery is won, the production control base side guides the specific push order, and when the main board recognizes that the reel stop button has been operated in the specific push order, it enters the special gaming state. You may make it transfer.

  When the special game state is started, the main board executes the special effect of the reel in every game of the specified number of games in the special game state. When the effect control board shifts to the special game state, it determines the number of additional games with respect to the number of continuing games of the ART game while synchronizing or relating to the special effects of the reel, and executes the effect for notifying the addition of the number of games. To do. The reel special effect is a game in which the main board (specifically, the CPU mounted on the main board) is in a special game state, and after the start lever is operated, the operation to the left middle right reel stop button becomes effective. In the meantime, the rotation form of at least one of the left, middle and right reels can be changed from the normal rotation form to various special patterns.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a special game state starting process. The main board executes the flowchart of FIG. 65 for each game in the special gaming state to determine the reel special effect pattern. First, a reel special effect pattern is selected based on the winning combination (condition device) (S6500). Next, it is determined whether or not the selected pattern is the pattern 1 (S6502), and if this is affirmed, the pattern 1 is executed (S6504). If the selected pattern is not pattern 1, it is determined whether or not it is pattern 2 (S6506), and if this is affirmed, pattern 2 is executed (S6508). When the selected pattern is not the pattern 2, it is determined whether or not the pattern is the pattern 3 (S6510), and when this is affirmed, the pattern 3 is executed (S6512). If the selected pattern is not pattern 3, pattern 4 is executed (S6514). Next, the main board determines the end of the special game state (s6516), and if this is affirmed, the special game state is ended and a normal ART game (chance RT2) in which the reel special effect is not performed is performed. If the result is negative, the process returns to S6500.

  According to the flowchart of FIG. 65, the main board determines a reel special effect pattern for each game during the special game state based on the winning combination (condition device). A plurality of patterns (pattern 1 to pattern 4) are set in the reel special effect pattern. FIG. 66 shows an example of a reel special effect pattern setting / selection table. This table is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM of the main board. When the main board determines the winning combination by lottery in each game in the special gaming state, the main board determines one reel special effect pattern based on the winning combination with reference to the table.

  When a plurality of reel special effect patterns correspond to one winning combination, the main board performs a lottery to determine the reel special effect pattern. The numbers in the table of FIG. 66 are numerator values indicating the winning probability of the reel special effect pattern (the denominator value is 256). 67 is a reel special effect execution control table for patterns 1 to 3 of the reel special effect, and FIG. 68 is an execution control table for pattern 4. After determining the reel special effect pattern, the main board reads the reel special effect control table corresponding to the determined reel special effect pattern, and executes the reel special effect while controlling the reel rotation mode according to the control order of each table. To do.

  As shown in FIG. 66, the special effect pattern (pattern 1 in FIG. 67) is a table selected when a bonus combination such as BB1, BB2, RB1, or RB2 is won in the internal lottery. As an explanation of the reel special effect executed in the special effect mode 1, first, after operating the start lever, the main board invalidates the reel stop, the left reel (L), the middle reel (N), and the right reel ( R) is controlled to a weight (W) state that does not rotate for a predetermined time (order 1), and then all reels are reversely rotated (R) (order 2). Then, the left reel is stopped (S) so that the first specific symbol is displayed on the middle line (order 3), and the middle reel is stopped so that the second specific symbol is displayed on the middle line. (Order 4), and the right reel is stopped so that the third specific symbol is displayed in the middle stage (Order 5). Further, the main board is controlled to wait for a predetermined time (order 6), and after the wait state or when the start lever is operated by the player during the wait state, the wait state is interrupted, The production ends, and then the reel is rotated forward to accept the operation of the reel stop button.

  On the main board, the first specific symbol, the second specific symbol, and the third specific symbol displayed on the middle line by the reel special effect differ depending on which winning combination is won by the internal lottery. That is, depending on whether BB1 and BB2 have been won or RB1 and RB2 have been won, the specific symbols displayed on the middle line are different, and symbols that are allowed to be displayed based on the winning are displayed on the middle line. For example, when BB1 is won, the first specific symbol, the second specific symbol, and the third specific symbol displayed by the reel special effect are “blue 7 symbols”. In addition, as a specific processing of the main board that executes the reel special effect in which “blue 7 symbol” is displayed in the middle line, the main board grasps the position of “blue 7 symbol” in the state where it was stopped in the previous game. Based on the decision to execute the reel special effect, the frames required to be displayed on the middle line from the stop position of “Blue 7 design” that was stopped in the previous game A process of performing control to move the reel for several minutes is executed.

  In reel special effect pattern 1, after reel special effects (orders 1 to 6) are executed, the reel stop button becomes operable, and the “blue 7 symbol” displayed on the middle line (when the winning combination is BB1) When the stop operation is accepted within the range in which the player can control the reel pull-in, the reels are stopped with the symbol combination in which “blue 7 symbols” are aligned on the effective line. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB1, BB2, RB1, or RB2 is established, the main board executes the BB game start process in accordance with the determination process, and the BB (RB) game ends after the BB (RB) game is played. The determination process is performed to end the BB (RB) game, and the normal chance ART2 state without the reel special effect is restored. During the BB (RB) game, digestion of the chance game in the chance ART2 state is suspended until the BB (RB) game ends.

  As described above, when the special effect pattern 1 (see FIG. 67 described later) in the special gaming state is executed, the player performs a reel stop operation on the symbol combination established corresponding to the winning combination won in the internal lottery. Will be taught in advance (in order 2-5). As a result, the player can not only improve the interest in reel special effects, but also can recognize the winning combination won in the internal lottery during the winning game. It is possible to prevent a game medal due to a useless game from being noticed even if a player with little gaming experience who is difficult to grasp the winning combination is aware that the winning combination has been established. Furthermore, in the special effect pattern 1 in order 6, after the process of stopping for a predetermined time from the state in which the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed, the reel special effect is ended when the player operates the start lever, The normal rotation of is started. As a result, the player can start the reel rotation at an arbitrary timing from the state of grasping the winning combination, so that the player can stop the symbol corresponding to the winning combination. Since the time delay until the position is ready can be adjusted by itself, and further, the rotation of the reels before the reel stop operation is started from a state where specific symbol combinations are aligned (order 3-5). Even when the reel rotates at a normal speed without reducing the rotation speed of the reel, the so-called difficulty of pushing can be reduced.

  It should be noted that, since starting the rotation of the reels after the procedure 6 reduces the difficulty of pushing the reels, it is preferable to rotate the reels at the same time. However, the rotation timing may be started not simultaneously with each reel. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest by making the player challenge the game based on various patterns with different difficulty levels.

  As shown in FIG. 66, patterns 2 and 3 (FIG. 67 is selected when the winning combination is other than the bonus (pattern 1) and the winning combination is other than the BAR replay (pattern 4). Reel special effects based on the reel vibration (V) are executed instead of the rotation of the reel, which means that the reel repeats forward and reverse rotation several times in a short cycle within the range of the rotation angle for one symbol. In pattern 2, after the main board vibrates the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel in this order (order 1-3), all the reels are waited for a predetermined time (order 4). Next, the reel is released from the frozen state, and the operation of the reel stop button is enabled.Then, when the player operates the stop button to stop the reel, the symbol displayed based on the winning combination is displayed. Depending on the combination Te, performance control board determines the number of plus game of ART game. This is the same even pattern 3.

  In pattern 3, the main board vibrates the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel in this order (order 1-3), waits for all the reels for a predetermined time (order 4), and then the right reel, the middle reel, The left reel is vibrated in this order (order 5-7), and after all the reels wait for a predetermined time (order 8), the reel special effect state of the reel is released, and the operation of the reel stop button is enabled. The production control board may generate special benefits such as adding the number of continued games of the ART game according to the winning combination, or may perform lottery of whether or not to add the number of games, It may be.

  For each game in the special gaming state, the player can be aware of the size of the special winning combination and the extra bonus for the number of games added from the reel special effect pattern. As described above, when the reel special effect is pattern 1, it is possible to know that the bonus has been won. The reel special effect in pattern 3 has one more step in which the three reels sequentially vibrate than the reel special effect in pattern 2, and the impression given to the player is stronger. Therefore, when the reel special effect of pattern 3 is executed, it is preferable that the effect control board is added and the number of games is increased.

  Pattern 4 (FIG. 68) is a reel special effect performed in a special game state in which the effect control board can be added and the number of games can be dramatically increased, among the reel special effects. 68 is a control table for executing the reel special effect of pattern 4 by the main board, and FIG. 69 is a flowchart for executing the reel special effect pattern 4 executed by the main board. As shown in FIG. 66, the pattern 4 is selected only when a specific combination (BAR replay) is selected, and the main board establishes a combination of specific symbols (BAR) multiple times within one game. The production control board determines the number of additional games each time a combination of specific symbols is established and displays it to the player. As long as the main board wins the continuous lottery, the ART game with the combination of specific symbols is continued. The continuous lottery is managed by the loop rate, and the loop rate has a plurality of modes, for example, a mode with a loop rate of 70% and a mode with a loop rate of 80%. Since the specific symbol is a BAR symbol, it is easy for the player to attract attention, and the player can recognize that the player is in a special gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the main board receives the operation of the start lever (S6900), and when the result of random number lottery (S6902) is determined that the winning combination is BAR replay, the reel special effect pattern 4 is selected. Then, the loop rate mode of the continuous lottery is determined by lottery (S6904). The distribution ratio is managed so that each of a plurality of modes is drawn at a predetermined ratio.

  Next, the process shifts to a reel special effect process (S6906). As shown in FIG. 68, the main board executes a reel special effect (orders 1 to 9) similar to pattern 3 and then executes a vibration effect for all reels. (Sequence 10), the left and right reels are rotated forward (F), the middle reel is rotated reversely (R), and all reels are stopped at the preparation stage (Sequence 11).

  The preparation eye is a symbol combination as a preparation state of a combination of specific symbols (BAR symbols). For example, as shown in (1) of FIG. This is a combination of replay symbols. The numbers in parentheses are array numbers in the symbol array of three reels (FIG. 46). In the state where the preparation mark is displayed as shown in FIG. 70 (1), the specific symbol (BAR) stops at a position immediately below the lower stage of the left and right reels, and the specific symbol stops at a position immediately above the middle reel. In this state, the player cannot predict the establishment of the specific symbol on the assumption that the preparatory eye is merely a replay that can be established frequently with no payout of game medals. That is, at the stage where the replay symbol is established on the line, the player cannot be aware of the establishment of the BAR replay winning combination. In conventional gaming machines, although the specific symbol combination is not displayed in the symbol display area, the specific symbol combination is arranged on the frame of the symbol display area or under the frame in order to quickly display the specific symbol combination in the display area. I was waiting in the state. However, in the form of FIG. 70 (1), since the specific symbol combinations are arranged in a variety of ways, the player cannot predict the specific symbol combination.

  After waiting for all reels for a predetermined time (order 12), the main board rotates the left and right reels backward by two symbols (rotates from bottom to top), and rotates the middle reel by two symbols forward (from top to bottom). Rotation), that is, with the minimum amount of rotation of all the reels, in S6908, the reels are stopped so that a combination of specific symbols is established in the middle line as shown in FIG. 70 (2) (order 13). The player suddenly turns to the specific symbol in a short time from the preparation eye while the left and right reels and the middle reel rotate in opposite directions (each of the reels rotate irregularly). By changing to the combination, it becomes possible for the first time to recognize that the game has shifted to the special game state based on the pattern 4 in the special game state for the first time.

  The winning combination in the ART game (chance RT2) is almost replay, and repeating the replay (high-frequency winning combination) will result in a monotonous game although it is an ART game. The special gaming state expects that a combination of specific symbols can be displayed even if a monotonous replay symbol combination is displayed just by winning frequently by reel special effects that suddenly change the combination to a specific symbol combination It can be given to the player for every game.

  Patterns 2 to 4 described above are based on reel special effect processing using the vibration of the reels respectively. When the effect of pattern 2 occurs, the player expects to proceed to the effect of pattern 3, When the effect of pattern 3 occurs, it is expected to proceed to the effect of pattern 4. In the production of pattern 4, in response to the combination of specific symbols displayed on the middle line, the production control board can determine the number of added games (granting benefits) by lottery, etc., and inform the player of this. (S6910).

  Next, after waiting all reels for a predetermined time (order 14), the main board vibrates all reels (order 15), and again waits for all reels for a predetermined time (order 16). Next, the main board rotates the left and right reels forward by 2 symbols and reversely rotates the middle reel by 2 symbols to prepare the above-described preparation from the state where the specific symbol combinations are aligned on the middle stage line (FIG. 70 (2)). The combination of symbols of the preparatory eye is instantly reproduced so that the eye state (FIG. 70 (1)) is obtained.

  Next, the main board waits for all the reels for a predetermined time (order 18), and during this time, a continuous lottery is executed as to whether or not to continue the processing after the order 13 at the loop rate obtained by the lottery in the loop rate mode (step 18). S6912). When this wait time elapses, the main board sets a new wait time (Sequence 19), and during this time, the production control board notifies the player of the result of the continuous lottery (for example, a start lever) (S6914) is performed to prompt (operation of the display means at the time of a specific symbol). No bet is required for the player's operation, and the main board continues processing based on the result of the continuous lottery at the earlier timing between the time when the player operates the start lever and the predetermined time (S6916). Set. That is, when the main board determines that the special gaming state is to be continued (YES in S6918), it returns to the step 13 in order after a predetermined wait time has elapsed (order 20), and the symbol combination is changed from the state of the preparatory state to the middle stage. The reel drive control is executed so that combinations of specific symbols are aligned ((2) → (1) in FIG. 70).

  On the other hand, if the main board is removed from the continuous lottery and it is determined that the special gaming state is not continued, after the wait time has elapsed (order 20), all reels are rotated forward to release the reel reel special effect (order 21). The operation of the reel stop button is validated (S6920). Then, the effect control board performs a teaching effect of the pressing order for the BAR replay (S6922). When the player corrects the order of pressing the BAR replay, which is the winning combination in the current game, and operates the reel stop button at an appropriate timing to display the BAR symbol combination in the middle row (S6924 Yes), the main board is next. The game is put into a re-playing state, and the effect control board is caused to execute processing for adding the number of games (giving a privilege) and to notify the end of the special gaming state while notifying the number of added games (S6926). .

  Thus, the gaming machine of the present invention is provided corresponding to the plurality of movable bodies provided with a plurality of types of symbols, the start starting means for starting the rotation of the plurality of movable bodies, and the plurality of movable bodies. Stop means for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of movable bodies, lottery means for performing lottery with respect to the winning combination based on the start start means, and symbol display means for displaying a symbol combination based on the result of the lottery A prize giving means for giving a prize based on the symbol combination displayed on the symbol display means, another lottery means for performing a lottery different from the lottery by the lottery means, and a lottery performed by the separate lottery means. Based on the result, when the privilege is granted by the privilege granting unit that can grant a privilege different from the award given by the prize granting unit, and by the privilege granting unit, Based on the above, the bonus granting expectation producing means that produces an effect by the movable body after the start of the plurality of movable bodies is started, and the execution of the bonus granting expectation presentation is performed regardless of the operation of the stopping means, A privilege granting instruction effect that teaches that the privilege is granted by the privilege granting unit before the operation of the stopping unit is validated by displaying the predetermined symbol combination in a visible manner on the display unit. Even if the privilege granting expected effect is executed, the privilege granting teaching effect is not executed and the predetermined symbol combination is not displayed, based on the stop operation of the stop means. Specific mode display permission control means capable of allowing stop display of the predetermined symbol combination, and stop display of the predetermined symbol combination permitted by the specific mode display permission control means. Te, in addition to the prize by the award imparting means, by further comprising a, a privilege granting re opportunities means capable of imparting the benefits, thereby achieving the benefits of the player in the special game state.

  If the player does not operate the reel stop button at an appropriate timing while correctly answering the pressing order of the reel stop button, the plurality of reels stop at a symbol combination that cannot display a specific symbol combination on the middle line, but the main board Discriminates against the player who operated the reel at an appropriate timing, for example, the production control board adds the number of games, but does not display the number of added games (S6948). You may perform the effect process for a figure. In this way, a privilege may be given to a player even if the combination of specific symbols is not complete. When the specific symbol combination is complete, it is desirable to be advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the specific symbol combination is not complete. For example, even if the specific symbol is not stopped on all three reels, a privilege according to the number of reels where the specific symbol is stopped on the active line is given, or when the specific symbol combination is prepared, The content is notified to the player, but if the specific symbol combination is not complete, as described above, the content of the privilege to be granted is kept secret, etc. It is desirable to perform an effect process for illustration.

  According to the reel reel special effect by pattern 4, even if the continuous lottery is not won even once, the gaming machine can increase the number of games in two stages of order 13 and order 21 during one game. It is possible to answer the player's expectation for an increase in the number of continuing ART games.

  On the other hand, as long as the continuous lottery is won, the addition of the ART game number is repeatedly executed in one game, so that the player can enjoy the acceleration feeling of the addition of the game number. And, from the display of the combination of specific symbols (order 13) in which the addition of the number of ART games is first executed to the continuation of the addition of the ART game (step 20) is currently performed without straddling a plurality of games. In order to advance in one game, the player can enjoy an accelerated gaming feeling that the addition of the number of ART games progresses at once.

  As described above, at the start of the special gaming state, the replay symbol combination is displayed before the BAR symbol combination is established. In this way, the reel special effect is started. First, the player feels the unexpected feeling that a BAR symbol combination in which a high privilege can be expected after the display of the replay symbol in which the privilege is not expected is realized from the start of the special game. Can be given to. The main board always displays the replay symbol combination as a preparation item before the BAR symbol combination is displayed in the middle of the special game, so that the player can improve the expectation for the replay symbol. Although the replay role is won frequently in the normal game state and the ART game state, it is a low privilege role because there is no payout, and it is not expected much even if the replay symbol combination is displayed, but the replay symbol combination is specified By making the symbol combination ready, the expectation for the replay symbol combination can be improved, and the game feeling can be enhanced.

  That is, the gaming machine according to the present invention individually includes a plurality of movable bodies provided with a plurality of types of symbols, starting start means for starting rotation of the plurality of movable bodies, and stopping rotation of the plurality of movable bodies individually. Stop means, lottery means for lottery with respect to a plurality of winning combinations based on the start start means, and symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol combination corresponding to the result of the lottery due to operation of the stop means; A game profit granting means for granting a game profit based on the symbol combination displayed on the symbol display means, the plurality of winning combinations being a high-frequency winning combination that can be won with a relatively high probability, and the high A low-frequency winning combination that can be won with a lower probability than the frequency winning combination, and when the low-frequency winning combination is won by the lottery means, the game that is given by the game profit granting means Profit Specific profit granting means that can further give a specific profit different from the above, and when the low-frequency winning combination is won by the lottery means, the symbol combination corresponding to the low-frequency winning combination is displayed on the symbol display means The low-frequency winning combination display means for executing control of the plurality of movable bodies and the symbol combination corresponding to the low-frequency winning combination display based on the control of the low-frequency winning combination display means In addition, even if the low-frequency winning combination is won by the lottery means, the specific profit granting teaching means capable of teaching the player to give the specific profit, and the symbol combination corresponding to the low-frequency winning combination Prior to display, the pattern mode forcible conversion means capable of executing control of the plurality of movable bodies for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the high-frequency winning combination is provided. To increase the sense of expectation for the role it is possible to improve the enjoyment feeling of the game. Each process (means) described here is executed by the main board and / or the effect control board.

  As described above, when the replay symbol combination is displayed as a preparatory pattern, the specific symbol (BAR symbol) is not in a straight line outside the frame of the display window, but is scattered outside the upper frame of the symbol display window and the lower frame of the symbol display window. Therefore, irregularity can be imparted when a specific symbol combination is established from the preparation stage. Furthermore, since the specific symbol stays at the closest position outside the symbol display window so that the amount of movement of the reel is minimized, the specific symbol combination can be moved from the outside of the frame by moving the reels within several frames in different directions. It is displayed on the middle line, and the player can be given an unexpected feeling as if a specific symbol combination suddenly appeared in front of him.

  As described above, when it is determined that the main board is out of the continuous lottery, the special effect state of the reel is released and the operation of the reel stop button is accepted. When the reel is not rotating, the player tries to stop the reel so as to display the specific symbol combination that is the winning combination while expecting an increase in the number of continued ART games. During the special game state where the reels are placed in the reel special production state, if you win a continuous lottery, you can win multiple times each time you win, or at the beginning of the special game state even if you do not win the continuous lottery once The main board displays a specific symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination. The player who has memorized this is the same in the case of the pattern 1 as in the case of the pattern 1, as the reel stop button after the reel special effect is made effective and the reel is stopped to assist the bonus symbol. It is easy to push a combination of specific symbols (BAR symbols).

  When the reel special effect is canceled, the player can operate the start lever at any time to start rotating the reel that is stopped while displaying the preparatory eye, and then aim for the symbol corresponding to the winning role To stop the reel. Since the player can rotate the reel at an arbitrary time, the player can create the timing for aiming at the symbol corresponding to the winning combination. The arbitrary timing is a predetermined time point within the wait time of order 19 in FIG. In FIG. 68, it has been described that if the start lever is not operated, the reels rotate when a predetermined time of order 19 and order 20 has elapsed. However, even if order 18 and order 19 are changed as follows. Good.

Order 18: Wait for a predetermined time (start lever operation promotion effect)
Order 19: Weight at which continuous lottery ends (continuous lottery is performed when the start lever is operated)
According to this example, the reel does not rotate (order 21) until the player operates the start lever. Therefore, the reel can be further arbitrarily rotated according to the player's intention. The player's expectation of whether or not a specific symbol arrangement is displayed is improved by the player's operation to the start lever at any timing also serving as a continuous lottery in the special gaming state, and improving the interest of the game Is effective.

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of rotating bodies provided with a plurality of symbols, a starting unit that starts rotation of the plurality of rotating bodies, and the plurality of rotating units rotated by the starting unit. Stop operation means for stopping the rotating body, lottery means for performing lottery with respect to the winning combination due to the operation of the start means, and when the stop operation means is operated, the lottery means is won Stop control means for executing stop control of the plurality of rotating bodies so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be displayed in the symbol display area, and a player based on the symbol combination displayed in the symbol display area A game profit granting means capable of giving a game profit to the game, and the stop control means has a specific symbol combination in the symbol display area when a specific combination is won among the winning combinations by the lottery means. If the stop means is performed in an appropriate operation mode, the specific mode permission means for executing the control of the stop control means is displayed so that the specific symbol combination is displayed. In addition, an operation non-accepting unit that does not accept an operation of the stop operation unit despite the fact that the specific symbol combination can be displayed by the specific mode permitting unit, and the operation non-acceptance And controlling the movement of the plurality of rotating bodies to display the specific symbol combination in the symbol display area while the stop operation means is not accepted by the means, and then displaying the symbol combination to the player. A winning combination clarification means maintained in a recognizable standby state, and a player to start the plurality of rotating bodies in the standby state at any time of the player by the winning combination clarification means Appropriate operation assisting means for causing the plurality of rotating bodies to rotate due to a predetermined operation, and enabling the operation acceptance of the stop operation means in accordance with the rotation of the plurality of rotating bodies by the appropriate operation assisting means. The operation reception start means is provided, so that it is possible to assist the player in pushing the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination.

  When the specified number of games in the special game state (for example, 10 games) is exhausted and the game processing for adding the number of ART games is completed, the effect control board displays the total number of added ART games. The main board can also continue the special game state from the next game after the game in which the special game state has ended. The end timing of the continuous game can be a normal replay combination or a bell-like event, or the number of prescribed games can be consumed. Since the special game state ends when the normal replay is won, the winning probability of the normal replay is high, so that the duration of the continuous game is adjusted to a relatively short time. The main board may determine the continuation of the special gaming state by lottery.

  In the above-described embodiment, the transition from the gaming state of the chance RT2 to the special gaming state has been described. However, when the ART replay is won even from the gaming state of the chance RT3, the transition to the special gaming state is confirmed. May be. The gaming state of the chance RT3 can be shifted from the chance RT1 based on the winning combination, and can also be shifted from the gaming state of the chance RT2. As can be seen from FIG. 49, since the winning probability of ART1-3 at chance RT3 is 10 times higher than the winning probability of chance RT2, the probability of entering chance RT3 from the ART game into the special gaming state is high. It can also be positioned as a mode. In the special game state, even if the ART replay is activated (the winning of ART replay and the pressing order are correct), the main board maintains the special game state and does not shift to the new special game state. In the above description, the main board explained that the reel special effects are performed in all winning combinations in the special gaming state, but the reel special effects may be performed in the specific winning combination. Alternatively, the necessity of the reel special effect may be determined by lottery.

[11-7. Priority setting of condition device corresponding to winning combination]
As described above in [10-1] and [11-4], in the slot machine 1, for example, when any of “AT1” to “AT10” is selected as a winning combination in the internal lottery, the reel The number of medals to be paid out as a prize differs depending on whether the stop operation is performed in an appropriate push order or in an inappropriate push order. Then, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the control for stopping the combination of symbols different depending on the pressing order is performed in the condition device (or the condition device including the combination of condition devices) corresponding to the winning combination. One feature is to define a condition device that operates preferentially under a predetermined condition by setting a priority for the device.

  FIG. 71A to FIG. 71C are diagrams for explaining setting of priority of the condition device. 71 (a) is a diagram showing the combination of symbols and the number of payouts corresponding to each small role, FIG. 71 (b) is a diagram showing the contents for each condition device, and FIG. 71 (c) is It is a figure which shows the priority conditions etc. with respect to an example of a winning combination. The contents of the small role described here are different from those described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53, but this is for convenience of description. In the following, the priority setting of the condition device will be described using the simple model shown in FIGS. 71A to 71C. In order to make the description easy to understand, in the reel stop operation, The correct push order (so-called three choices) by operating which reel stop button is the first push order in the middle left and right, so that the priority of the conditional device changes, the reel stop button push order and the reel design The relationship with the pull-in control will be described.

  First, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), each of the small roles 1 to 8 is composed of a combination of a symbol “bell 1” or a symbol “bell 2” attached to each of the left, middle, and right reels. When the symbol combination (bell symbol) of each small role is established on the active line, nine medals are paid out. Here, in the first reel (the left reel 301a) and the third reel (the right reel 301c), the bell 1 and the bell 2 each have an appropriate stop timing so that the pull-in control can be executed on the effective line. In the case of improper stop timing, it is assumed that each bell cannot be drawn on the effective line. However, if it is sufficient that either bell 1 or bell 2 can be drawn on the active line (that is, if bell 1 and bell 2 are not distinguished from each other), It is assumed that such a bell is disposed within a range where the pull-in control to the active line can be performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), condition devices 1 to 9 are defined for each small combination. First, the case where each condition apparatus 1-9 is individually selected and act | operates is demonstrated. Since the condition devices 1 to 8 are condition devices corresponding to the respective small roles 1 to 8, when any of the condition devices 1 to 8 is operated, when a reel stop operation is performed at an appropriate stop timing, The symbol combination of the corresponding small part can be stopped, but if the reel is stopped at an improper stop timing, the symbol combination of loss (corresponding to the above-mentioned “Bell Kobome”) is on the effective line. Will stop. On the other hand, since the condition device 9 is composed of the condition devices of the small roles 1 to 8, when the condition device 9 operates, the bell stop operation is performed at any stop timing. 1 or the bell 2 can be drawn on the active line, and any symbol combination of the small roles 1 to 8 is stopped.

  Next, “conditioning device 1 + conditioning device 9” shown in FIG. 71 (c) will be described as an example of a case where a plurality of condition devices are established. “Condition device 1 + Condition device 9” is a combination of condition devices, but since it can also be regarded as a condition device, it is referred to as “condition device A” for convenience. At this time, the condition device A is preferentially activated depending on which reel becomes the first stop reel by the reel stop operation (priority condition). The priority condition in the condition device A is that when the first stop reel is the first reel (left reel 301a) or the second reel (middle reel 301b), the condition device 1 operates preferentially and the first stop reel Is the third reel (right reel 301c), the condition device 9 is preferentially operated. When the condition device 1 operates with priority according to the priority condition, the reel stop control is performed so as to draw the symbol combination of the small combination 1 corresponding to the condition device 1 as described above. As a result, when the reel stops are in the proper order and the stop timing is the appropriate stop timing, the symbol combination of the small part 1 stops on the active line and nine payouts are performed. If the timing is an improper stop timing, the “bell bells” will be stopped as a miss due to missing of the small part 1 and no payout will be made (no payout number). Therefore, in the condition device A, the number of medals that can be expected when the condition device 1 is preferentially operated according to the priority condition is less than 9 in consideration of the case of bell bumps. On the other hand, when the condition device 9 operates with priority in accordance with the priority condition, as described above, any of the small roles 1 to 8 corresponding to the condition device 9 at any timing of the reel stop. Reel stop control is performed so as to draw such a symbol combination. As a result, no matter what stop timing the reel stop button is operated, any combination of symbols 1 to 8 will stop on the active line, and 9 coins will always be paid out. Is called.

  That is, when the condition device A is selected and operated, if the first stop reel is the third reel (equivalent to right push or reverse scissor push), nine sheets are always paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation. On the other hand, if the first stop reel is other than the third reel (equivalent to forward press, scissor press, or intermediate press), 9 sheets are paid out only when the stop operation is performed at an appropriate stop timing. When the stop operation is performed at an inappropriate stop timing, the payout is not performed. Since the above-described priority condition is set in the condition device A, the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment can not only realize control for stopping different symbol combinations depending on the pressing order, but also the condition device. It is also possible to change the expected value of the number of payouts so that a higher number of medals can be expected when 9 is preferentially activated than when the condition device 1 is preferentially activated.

  In the above description with reference to FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (c), for the sake of simplicity, only the first stop reel is used as a condition, and there are differences with respect to three possible pressing orders based on the first stop reel. However, the priority condition of the condition device in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is not limited to this. For example, the second stop reel may have a further condition. By increasing the conditions in this way, it is possible to set the condition device to be activated more finely, for example, stopping not only for the three pushing orders but also for the four, five, or six pushing orders. The combination of symbols can be controlled. Note that the six types of pressing order are forward pressing (left → middle → right), scissor pressing (left → right → middle), middle pressing (middle → left → right, and middle → right → left), and reverse pressing ( Corresponds to right → middle → left) and reverse scissor push (right → left → middle).

  In the above description with reference to FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (c), the same number of condition devices 1 to 9 is used when the stop operation is performed at an appropriate stop timing. Although it is associated with the small roles 1 to 8 so that nine sheets are paid out, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is not limited to this, and for example, depending on the operating condition device, different numbers of pieces are paid out. You may control so that. As an example, when a condition device corresponding to a small combination with a difference is preferentially operated by giving a difference to the number of payouts of at least one of the small roles 1 to 8, a difference is made in the number of payouts. Can be generated.

  In this way, by setting the priority of the condition device that operates based on the pressing order, and further changing the number of payouts when the symbol combination is established for each condition device, the priority condition is satisfied (that is, the symbol establishment is achieved). Expected number of medals to be paid out in the appropriate pushing order) and the expected number of medals to be paid when the priority condition is not satisfied (ie, improper pushing order when the symbol is established) It is possible to realize control that makes a greater difference with respect to the expected value of.

  In addition to [11-7], there is a description that “a combination of symbols corresponding to the conditional device is allowed to be displayed on the effective line”. As described in [11-7], “reel” means a reel in which a predetermined condition device is activated based on the priority condition, and a combination of symbols corresponding to the activated condition device is drawn on the effective line. This corresponds to execution of stop control.

[11-8. Penalty settings]
The game processing in the slot machine 1 has been described above. However, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the reels that are rotating are stopped, “push order navigation” in which a specific push order is taught is displayed. Except for the game state under certain conditions such as, a specific push order is recommended or required. The specific pressing order is usually "forward pressing (pressing operation in order from the left reel stop button)" (or "scissor pressing" (pressing the right reel stop button after operating the left reel stop button)) It is. According to such a recommended stop operation, a pressing order (hereinafter referred to as “regular press”) for first stopping the left reel 301a by operating the reel stop button 211a is required. In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when an improper stop operation for stopping the reels in a pressing order different from the regular pressing (hereinafter referred to as “anomalous pressing”) is performed, the CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510 is performed. Thus, a penalty is set for a predetermined game thereafter. The irregular pressing includes “reverse pressing”, “reverse scissor pressing”, “middle pressing”, and the like described above. Below, the setting of the penalty in the slot machine 1 by this embodiment is demonstrated.

  When the reel stop order is taught by the push order navigation, the push order according to the teach is regarded as the “appropriate push order”, and the push order different from the teach is designated as “unsuitable push order”. ”, A penalty may be set for a subsequent predetermined game when a stop operation is performed in an inappropriate pressing order. At this time, for example, when the push order navigation teaches the push order of “reverse push”, “reverse push”, which is originally regarded as an irregular push, is determined as “appropriate push order”, and other than “reverse push” Even if the order of pressing is “forward pressing” or “scissor pressing”, which is normally regarded as regular pressing, it is determined as “inappropriate pressing order”.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, whether or not the pressing order is appropriate does not matter in a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, during a BB game) (the pressing order is not determined).

[11-8-1. Command from main board to production control board]
Here, before describing the penalty setting, a command received by the CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510 from the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 will be described.

  FIG. 72 is a list showing an example of commands transmitted from the main board to the effect control board. Each command shown in FIG. 72 is transmitted from the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 to the CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510 via the input / output interfaces 1116 and 1130 at a predetermined timing, and 1-byte mode data ( MODE) and 1-byte EXT data (EXT) indicating the contents of the command. The CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510 that has received such a command can determine the type of the command from the mode data included in the command, and can determine the content of the command from the EXT data. For example, when a command “94XX (h)” is received, the CPU 1118 receives a command whose mode data is “94 (h)”, and the content of the command is “XX (h)”. Can be determined. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number.

  72, a command indicated by “85XX (h)” is produced by the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 whether or not the BB is internally won, the type of the BB that has been internally won (BB1 to BB2 shown in FIG. 50), and the main board 409. This is an internal winning command for designating whether to execute (for example, a reel special effect). The command indicated by “86XX (h)” is a winning number command for designating an internal winning result (flag number of the internal winning flag). Note that the internal winning command does not need to be generated because the internal winning result can be identified by the winning number command, but the determination on the program can be simplified by providing the internal winning command. The “information command indicating the result of the internal lottery” described in [11-2] or the like corresponds to an internal winning command or a winning number command.

  In FIG. 72, a command indicated by “8BXX (h)” is a winning number command for designating the type of winning combination. A command indicated by “8CXX (h)” is a payout number command for designating the payout number of medals.

  In FIG. 72, a command indicated by “94XX (h)” is a game counter 1 command for designating the value of the game counter at the start of the game. The command indicated by “95XX (h)” is an RT information command for designating whether or not the RT state and the type of the RT state. The command indicated by “96XX (h)” is a game counter 2 command for designating the value of the game counter at the end of the game.

  In FIG. 72, a command indicated by “E0XX (h)” is an inserted number command for designating the number of inserted medals. For example, the command E000 (h) is used when the number of inserted medals is 1, the command E001 (h) is used when the number of inserted medals is 2, and the number of inserted medals is 3. Command E002 (h) is used. The command indicated by “E1XX (h)” is a bonus type command for designating whether or not BB is executed and which of BB1 and BB2 is being executed. The command indicated by “E2XX (h)” is a game state command for designating a game state being executed (in BB, in RB, in re-playing, in a setting change, etc.). Note that the “MAX bet command” described above in [11-4] is an example of an inserted number command. For example, when three medals are inserted as a MAX bet, the command E002 (h) is the MAX bet command. It corresponds to.

  Other commands transmitted from the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 to the CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510 include a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a return command, a setting change command, an error command, and the like.

  The reel start command is a command for notifying the start of rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, and can include information that can specify the reel that has started rotation, the start time of rotation, and the like.

  The reel stop command can specify the reel to be stopped among the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, the area number of the stop operation position of the corresponding reel, and the area number of the stop position of the corresponding reel. Command. The reel stop command is transmitted when a stop operation (external operation) is performed on the corresponding reel stop button 211a, 211b, 211c while the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are rotating. The CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510 can specify which of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c is operated by receiving the reel stop command.

  The return command is a command indicating that the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 has returned to the control state before the power is turned off. The setting change command is a command indicating that the setting is being changed, and is transmitted when the setting change state is entered. Note that the control state of the CPU 1110 on the main board 409 is initialized with the transition to the setting change state, and therefore it is possible to specify that the control state of the CPU 1110 has been initialized by receiving the setting change command. . The error command is a command indicating occurrence or cancellation of an error state, the type of the error state, and the like.

  The CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510 can determine the winning combination determined by the internal lottery by receiving the internal winning command, the winning number command, etc. from the CPU 1110 of the main board 409, and the conditions corresponding to the winning combination The device (or combination of condition devices) can be determined. Further, in the condition device (or combination of condition devices) determined as described above, the CPU 1118 includes a condition device for incorrect push order such as small items 1 to 16 and a condition device for correct push order such as small items 17. Can be determined based on the priority condition for the condition device, such that the push order correct answer condition device operates with priority (the correct answer push order).

[11-8-2. Penalty processing]
FIG. 73 is a flowchart for explaining the penalty processing of the main board 409. With reference to FIG. 73, a penalty process in a series of game flows will be described.

  First, a BET process (corresponding to step S2 in FIG. 54), an internal lottery process (corresponding to step S3 in FIG. 54), and a reel rotation process (corresponding to step S4 in FIG. 54) are performed, thereby starting the reel. Is performed (step S1001). Details of the reel starting process in step S1001 correspond to the series of processes described with reference to FIG. 55, but the process shown in FIG. 55 is an example of a process for controlling the rotation of the reel, and is not limited thereto. It is not something.

  Next, as an external operation by the player, a stop operation is performed on the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c (step S1002). Note that the player can freely select the order in which the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are operated (pressed). However, as described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a specific pressing order is used. The player is recommended to stop using “forward push” or “scissors push” except for games under certain conditions such as “push order navigation” displayed. When the recommended procedure is followed, the reel stop button 211a corresponding to the left reel 301a is operated first.

  In response to the stop operation performed by the player in step S1002, the slot machine 1 performs the stop processing of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c corresponding to the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c for which the stop operation has been performed. (Step S1003). The details of the reel stop process correspond to a series of processes described with reference to FIG. 57, but the process shown in FIG. 57 is an example of a process for controlling the stop of the reel, and is not limited thereto. Absent. When each reel 301a, 301b, 301c is stopped, a reel stop command including information on the stopped reel is transmitted from the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 to the CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510. In step S1003, when the reel stop process is completed, if a predetermined symbol combination is established, a refund or replay preparation is performed in accordance with the established symbol combination.

  The CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510 that has received the reel stop command in step S1003 knows the order of the reels stopped in step S1003 from the received reel stop command, so the player can change the pressing order of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c. Judgment can be made. Then, the CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510 performs a stop operation to be a target (penalty target) for which the player's stop operation for the game sets (imposes) a penalty based on the pressing order of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c. It is determined whether or not (step S1004). Details of the criterion in step S1004 will be described later.

  If the CPU 1118 determines that it is not a penalty operation to be penalized in step S1004 (NO in step S1004), the series of processes of the game ends. If the CPU 1118 determines that the stop operation should be a penalty in step S1004 (NO in step S1004), a process for setting a predetermined penalty for a predetermined game after the game (setting a penalty) Is performed, and the series of processes of the game ends. When a penalty is imposed, the CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510 notifies the player of a display regarding the setting of the penalty using an LED, a liquid crystal display device (not shown) or the like provided on the frame member 501. You may do it.

  When a penalty is set, for example, a predetermined value is added to the penalty counter held in the RAM 1122 of the effect control board 510. Then, at the start of the subsequent game, the CPU 1118 can determine whether or not the game is a penalty game by referring to the value of the penalty counter.

  In FIG. 73, the penalty target determination process shown in step S1004 and the penalty setting process shown in step S1005 are performed after all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped in steps S1002 to S1003. Alternatively, it may be performed each time the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped.

[11-8-3. Penalty judgment]
Hereinafter, a process (corresponding to step S1004 in FIG. 73) in which the CPU 1118 determines whether or not the stop operation by the player is a stop operation to be penalized (a penalty target) will be described.

  The CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510 refers to the stop operation pressing order derived from the reel stop command received in step S1003, and determines whether the stop operation is “forward pressing” or “scissor pressing”. At this time, when the reel stop operation is first performed on the left reel 301a, it can be determined as “forward pressing” or “scissor pressing”, so the CPU 1118 is the recommended “regular pressing”. It is determined that it is not a penalty target. Further, when the reel stop operation is first performed on the middle reel 301b or the right reel 301c, it can be determined that neither “forward pressing” nor “scissor pressing” is performed, so the CPU 1118 performs “irregular pressing”. It is judged that it was broken, and it is judged as a penalty object. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the ART (or AT) state, the effect control board 510 does not determine the penalty object, or the operation of the reel stop button indicates that the push order navigation teaches “appropriate push order. As described above, the penalty target may be determined based on whether or not the reel stop button has been operated.

[11-8-4. Penalty details]
As shown in step S1005 of FIG. 73, when the CPU 1118 determines that the stop operation by the player is a penalty object, the CPU 1118 performs processing (setting a penalty) for setting a predetermined penalty for the subsequent predetermined game. However, the details of the penalty will be described below.

  The effect control board 510 determines the contents of the penalty. The content of the penalty is not particularly limited. For example, a penalty period is added to the number of games (ceiling) in which the game state shifts to the advantageous game state without performing the above-described lottery transition to ART for a certain number of games. No game number is added (that is, the number of games during the penalty period is not subject to the game number release process), the current mode of the gaming state during the penalty period is changed to the advantageous mode (high-accuracy mode with high ART winning probability, Alternatively, the transition to the ultra-high accuracy mode is not performed, or the lottery for the transition is not performed. It should be noted that, in a game that is subject to a penalty by irregularly operating the reel stop button, if there is no payout of medals by the established small role, it may not be subject to a penalty. For example, when the winning combination is AT9 shown in FIG. 50, when the reel stop button is operated in the order of reverse scissors push (right → left → middle) against the forward push, the bell design according to the condition device of the accessory 17 Will always be on the active line and 9 medals will be awarded, so this will be subject to a penalty, but the reel stop button will be pressed halfway (the middle reel stop button is operated first) or scissors pressed (left → Right → Middle) is operated, and if the bell symbol is not established on the active line, it will not be penalized.

  The effect control board 510 sets a penalty period and a penalty content when a penalty is set. The penalty period is set mainly by the number of games. For example, if the penalty period is 10G, a penalty is executed for 10G. The start of the penalty period can be set as appropriate, such as from the penalty-targeted game, the next game, or the later game. Management of the penalty period is performed by a counter set in the RAM 1122 of the effect control board 510. The effect control board 510 describes the subtraction of the counter for each game after the start of the penalty. When the counter value is equal to or less than a predetermined value, for example, zero, the penalty is terminated or canceled. Alternatively, the counter is set with the increment of game medals in the penalty-targeted game, that is, the number of game medals increased when the reel stop button is pressed forward or irregularly, and in the subsequent games The difference between the number of consumptions and the number of game medals paid out (consumption number-number of payouts) may be subtracted from the counter, and the penalty may be continued until the number of games where the value of the counter becomes zero or less.

[11-8-5. Avoiding the penalty]
The gaming machine according to the present invention operates the reel stop button even if the reel stop button is operated in a pushing order different from the prescribed pushing order (the pushing order recommended by the gaming machine for the player), that is, the so-called irregular pushing. The form can be treated as an object that is not penalized within a certain range. That is, even if the player operates the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c so that the irregular push is performed, the main board 409 stops the reel drive motors 411a, 411b, and 411c so that the player does not push the irregular push as a result. Execute control (penalty avoidance control). In the following description, the prescribed pressing order is the order in which the left reel stop button 211a becomes the first stop (the left reel stop button 211a (first stop) → the middle reel stop button 211b (second stop) → the right reel). Stop button 211c (third stop)) or scissor push (left reel stop button 211a (first stop) → right reel stop button 211c (second stop) → middle reel stop button 211b (third stop)) .

  The main board 409 starts the rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, and when the rotation speed of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c becomes constant, the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c The operation valid lamp is lit, and the player can know that the depressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c has become effective (corresponding to step S109 in FIG. 55).

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (general state or normal RT), the main board 409 does not activate all the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c at the same time, but the reel stop buttons other than the first stop button. The timing for enabling the operation is delayed from the timing when the operation of the first stop button (left reel stop button) is enabled. Even if the middle reel stop button 211b or the right reel stop button 211c is operated before the left reel stop button 211a within this delay period, the middle reel 211b or the right reel 211c is not stopped. Not subject to penalty.

  When the player notices that the pressing order of the reel stop buttons is not correct at this point and presses the left reel stop button 211a again to stop all the reels, the effect control board 510 performs the reel stop operation of the player. S1004 is negatively determined that the operation mode is as defined. On the other hand, when the player notices that the pressing order of the reel stop buttons is not correct at the time point described above, the player presses the same reel stop button again, and after this operation has passed the delay time, The operation of the middle reel stop button 211b or the right reel stop button 211c causes the corresponding reels 301b and 301c to stop before the left reel 301a, and the player's operation of the reel stop button becomes an off-regulation operation and is subject to a penalty. Is processed as

  When the player operates the left reel stop button 211a first and then operates the other reel stop buttons 211b and 211c, if the above-described delay time is long, the other reel stop buttons 211b and 211c This is not preferable because the corresponding reels 301b and 301c cannot be stopped. Penalty avoidance processing is intended to prevent a player who wants to operate the left reel 301a first from operating the other reel stop buttons 211b and 211c so as not to be subject to a penalty. Therefore, if the delay time is too short, the operations of the reel stop buttons 211b and 211c other than the left reel stop button 211a are mostly performed after the operations of the reel stop buttons 211b and 211c are validated. Therefore, it is not preferable. From such a viewpoint, the delay time is preferably about 0.5 seconds. When the middle reel stop button 211b or the right reel stop button 211c is first operated after the delay time has elapsed, the corresponding reel (the middle reel 301b or the right reel 301c) is stopped before the left reel 301a. The control board 510 processes the operation of the reel stop button as a penalty object.

  In the normal gaming state, the player tries to operate each reel stop button 211a to 211c in turn from the left reel stop button 211a after turning on the start lever 210, but when this rhythm is broken, The other reel stop buttons 211b and 211c may be operated before the left reel stop button 211a. For example, this is a case where the effect control board 510 executes a display prompting the user to press the chance button after the start lever 210 is turned on. When the chance button is displayed, the player tries to operate the chance button before the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c as much as possible, but first operates the left reel stop button 211a with the rhythm of the forward operation of the reel stop button. To do. However, if an attempt is made to operate the chance button in the process of the player's operation for the operation, the player confuses the operation order of the reel stop buttons, and the reel stop buttons 211b, The reel stop buttons 211b and 211c other than the left reel stop button 211a may be touched in the process of operating the 211c or moving toward the chance button operation. The chance button is a display button for generating effects such as effect switching. It may be provided separately from the medal insertion button 206, but may also serve as the medal insertion button 206.

  Therefore, the main board 409 avoids a penalty only when the condition device of the winning combination determined in the internal lottery process S3 can execute the promotion display of the chance button operation on the effect control board 510 such as SB or chance. Processing may be executed.

  Further, the main board 409 does not perform a penalty avoidance operation except when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (general state, normal RT). This is because, for example, in the ART in an advantageous gaming state, the other reel stop buttons 211b and 211c are usually operated before the left reel stop button 211a. In this case, when the player operates the reel stop buttons 211b and 211c other than the left reel stop button 211a according to the display of the pressing order, if the delay period is set, the middle / right reel stop buttons 211b and 211c The reels 301b and 301c cannot be stopped by the operation. In addition, during the bonus, “ALL” (the winning combination that is a lottery target only during the bonus game, and when the lottery result is “ALL”, the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c in any push order and at any timing. Even if the button is operated, the symbol combination of the accessory 17 is displayed on the active line.) Since the winning probability is high, any reel stop button 211a to 211c may be operated in the first place. .

  The player knows that the reel stop buttons 211b and 211c corresponding to the reels other than the left reel 301a are enabled with a delay from the left reel stop button 211a by the delay in lighting of the operation enable lamps of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c. be able to. Note that the operation effective lamps of all the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c may be turned on when the left reel stop button 211a is enabled. Further, the rotation of the reels 301a to 301c may be started in accordance with the timing of enabling the reel stop button. In addition, when the main board 409 performs the ART transition lottery instead of the effect control board 510 performing the ART transition lottery, the transition control lottery is won and the presentation control board 510 starts the ART game. In the case where the winning order is superior or inferior like AT10, the first stop button is activated in accordance with the order in which the second stop / third stop button operation other than the reel stop button to be stopped first is performed. It may be delayed from the timing of conversion. Further, the main board 409 can change and set the delay time as appropriate. For example, the delay time in the latter is made shorter than that in the former for the winning combination that the chance button operation promotion display can be performed on the effect control board 510 and the winning combination that cannot be expected. Furthermore, when the recommended operation mode of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is a forward pressing mode that is the order of the middle left and right, it is further delayed than the timing of enabling the middle reel stop button 211b (second stop button). Thus, the right reel stop button 211c (third stop button) may be validated. As a result, even if the correct reel stop button 211a is operated as the first stop button, the player is rescued so that the third stop button is erroneously operated before the second stop button is not subject to a penalty. be able to.

[11-8-6. Penalty reduction process]
Although the gaming machine according to the present invention has been executed an inappropriate operation that is subject to penalty, as an estimation or determination as to whether or not this mode of inappropriate operation is due to the player's intentional results, It is configured to adjust the degree of an unfavorable gaming state (penalty) for the player. When the gaming machine clearly determines the mode of improper operation by the intentional result of the player (execute improper operation with positive intentions), while the penalty processing is performed as it is, Check the situation where improper operation was performed, and depending on the situation, it would be harsh to give the player a penalty as it is, do not generate a penalty, cancel the penalty that occurred once, or change the content of the penalty The degree of the unfavorable gaming state is adjusted, for example, by relaxing so as not to be disadvantageous to the player.

  A gaming machine having a main board 409 and an effect control board 510 can be used to indicate the state of improper operation of the player, the temporal element in the player's reel stop button operation, the past history of improper operation, or a combination thereof. Evaluate by etc. First, a case will be described in which the situation of the player's inappropriate operation is evaluated based on the player's operation over the reel stop button over time. Despite the player trying to operate the reel stop buttons in a predetermined order after the start of rotation of multiple reels, the result is that the player does not follow the order of pressing, resulting in an inappropriate game operation mode. It can happen. For example, the reel stop button to be operated first is operated before the operation of the reel stop button is enabled, and after the reel stop button is enabled, the other reel stop buttons are operated first, and as a result This is a case where the gaming machine recognizes that the reel stop button is irregularly pressed. Since such an operation of the player is not intentionally performed, the main board detects the operation mode by checking the timing when the reel stop button is operated.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c start rotating from the time when the wait timer expires after the start lever is operated, and the stop button of each reel is effective in synchronization with it. Next, the reels 301a to 301c are stopped by operating the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c. In the normal gaming state, the player tries to execute each game quickly and repeatedly with the aim of shifting to an advantageous game. Thus, after the start lever 210 is operated, the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are to be operated in order from the left. The setting value of the wait timer is regulated to be somewhat longer, such as 4.1 seconds, and the player's first stop button operation is sometimes performed before the wait timer expires. The second stop button, which continues without the operation of the 1 stop button being activated, is operated after the wait timer expires. Then, the effect control board 510 determines that the player's operation on the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is irregularly pressed, and generates a penalty, assuming that the stop button to be operated second is operated earliest.

  Therefore, the main board 409 detects the operation of the first stop button within a certain period (immediately before the time up) after the operation of the start lever 210 and before the wait timer expires, and sends a command including the detection result to the effect control board. By passing to 510, the effect control board 510 can know that the first stop button is operated immediately before the wait timer time is up, and that another reel stop button is operated after the wait timer time is up. As a result, the effect control board 510 determines that the player's inappropriate operation is not intended by the player, and does not determine the player's operation as a penalty target, cancels the penalty, or sets the penalty counter to zero. It is possible to prevent the player from being penalized by setting a penalty such that the penalty content is not set.

  However, the fact that the inappropriate operation unintended by the player is not regarded as the player's irregular operation by the effect control board 510 results in that the inappropriate operation of the player is allowed without being a penalty. Therefore, a skilled player may actively execute such an inappropriate operation. Therefore, the main board 409 sets the above-described predetermined time during which an inappropriate operation by the player is permitted, that is, the time until the wait timer expires to an extremely short time, so that an unconscious operation of the skilled player is performed. Can be eliminated.

  Since the main board 409 detects the operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c immediately before the wait timer expires, the reel stop button operation is performed so that the operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c can be detected before the wait timer expires. And a flag area for checking whether or not the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are stopped immediately before the wait timer expires is set in the RAM area 1114 for each reel stop button 211a to 211c. . The player operates the left reel stop button 211a immediately before the way timer time is up, and continues to operate the middle reel stop button 211b and the right reel stop button 211c after the wait timer is up, and the left reel 301a is not stopped. When the left reel stop button 211a is re-operated to stop the left reel 301a, the player's operation is subject to a conventional penalty as an irregular push against the forward push. On the other hand, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the main board 409 is displayed in the operation recording area of the left reel stop button 211a to be operated first, and in a short time until the left reel stop button 211a expires the wait timer. Information indicating that it has been operated is set in the flag area, and this flag information and information on the operation order of the plurality of reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are included in the command and transmitted to the effect control board 510. In response to this, the effect control board 510 can know that the left reel stop button 211a has been operated before the middle reel stop button 211b and the right reel stop button 211c immediately before the wait timer time is up. The operation mode of the player's reel stop buttons 211a to 211c in this game is not intended by the player, and the penalty process can be relaxed so as to be advantageous to the player as described above. In addition, after the operation of the start lever 201 and before the wait timer expires, the player intentionally operates the reel stop button 211a to be operated first several times, and as a result, the operation immediately before the wait timer expires. There can be a set of flags to. Therefore, the main board 409 does not set the flag or controls the flag information when the reel stop button 211a is operated a plurality of times after the start lever 201 is operated and before the wait timer expires. Transmission to the substrate 510 can be prevented.

  The effect control board 510 can record the occurrence history of the penalty operation in the RAM area for each game. The effect control board 510 can refer to the penalty occurrence history in the past game in the penalty processing in the game in which the above-described inappropriate operation has occurred. For example, check the frequency of operations that have been penalized from the previous number of games (for example, several hundred times) to the current game, and if the occurrence frequency is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, In addition, all operations in which the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are not operated according to the determined pressing order can be set as a penalty. If the operation frequency that is targeted for the penalty is high, it can be considered that the player has an intention of not complying with the pushing order of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c recommended or requested by the player. By referring to the past history, it is possible to determine that the above-described inappropriate operation was originally based on the player's intention. It should be noted that the operation history that is a penalty target may or may not include the above-described inappropriate operation, or may be a history that includes only the above-described inappropriate operation.

  Next, another embodiment of penalty reduction processing will be described. In this embodiment, whether the disadvantageous game degree adjusting means (such as the effect control board 510) has operated the stop operation means that should be stopped first within a predetermined time after the rotation of the plurality of rotation display bodies is started. If the determination is negative and the affirmative determination is made and the disadvantageous gaming state (penalty) is further executed, the degree of the disadvantageous gaming state is further determined if the determination is denied and the disadvantageous gaming state It is characterized by relieving so that it becomes a game rather than the said disadvantageous game when (penalty) is performed.

  The main board 409 is configured so that the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c are rotated from the time of rotation or the left reel stop button 211a, the middle reel stop button 211b, and the right reel stop button 211c are activated. The time required to operate the stop buttons 211a to 211c is recorded in the RAM area 1114. Next, the main board sends information in the RAM area 1114 to the effect control board 510. The effect control board 510 determines whether or not the operation of the reel stop button operated first matches the reel stop button to be operated first based on the recommended pressing order. First, it is determined whether the reel stop button operated first is operated within a predetermined time after the rotation of the reel. If the first operated reel stop button is operated within a predetermined time, a penalty mitigation process is applied because the player's inappropriate operation is not intended by the player. On the other hand, if the reel stop button operated first is not operated within a predetermined time, it is assumed that the player's inappropriate operation is due to the player's intention, and the penalty is not taken without taking penalty relief measures. Determine the content. Inappropriate operations for the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c which are not intended by the player tend to happen by chance in the process of the player trying to push forward the operation of the plurality of reel stop buttons 211a to 211c without hesitation. Therefore, the tendency to be performed within a short predetermined time after the start of reel rotation is high. On the other hand, an inappropriate operation by the player's intention is performed at least to some extent while losing the pressing order of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c with the aim of taking the game medium. There is a high tendency to be done when it is beyond a short period. Therefore, the production control board distinguishes the latter case as a penalty application target and the former case as a penalty reduction application target.

  In the above description, penalty reduction processing is applied based on the operation mode of the reel stop button operated first, but it is further operated secondly with the reel stop button operated second. The determination of the penalty reduction processing is executed in consideration of the comparison with the reel stop button to be performed and the comparison result between the elapsed time from the operation point of the first operated reel stop button and the predetermined time. It may be. Further, the main board 409 may execute various determinations regarding the operation timing of the reel stop button. Furthermore, the penalty reduction processing may be performed with reference to the execution history of the penalty target operation in the past game.

[11-8-7. Diversification of penalty processing]
The gaming machine according to the present invention can achieve diversification of penalty processing. Conventionally, when the above-mentioned irregular pressing on the reel stop button, which is a penalty, is performed, a uniform form of penalty processing is performed, such as no lottery of advantageous games in subsequent games. On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention has a plurality of penalty processing modes, achieves diversification of penalty processing, and can suppress a decrease in a player's gaming motivation even if a penalty is imposed. .

  As the first of various modes of penalty processing, there is conventional penalty processing, and when there are irregular operations on a plurality of reel stop buttons in a normal gaming state etc., the player will be penalized for a prescribed number of games after the next game. Subject to disadvantageous gaming conditions. In other words, the penalty process continues until the prescribed game is consumed.

  As a second of various modes of penalty processing, there is a mode in which the penalty processing can be completed early. In other words, the player is given a chance to eliminate the penalty. For example, a player can have an opportunity to actively end a penalty early by spending a predetermined price. Players are freed from penalties at an early stage, thereby increasing their willingness to play games.

  As a third of various modes of penalty processing, there is a mode in which the penalty can be terminated before the player feels a penalty. Since the player does not need to be aware of the penalty suppression, the player can tackle the game while maintaining his willingness to play.

  Each aspect of the penalty processing is managed by the effect control board 510 with a flag. When determining the penalty and determining the content of the penalty, the effect control board 510 uses a random number to draw a penalty processing mode. The effect control board 510 sets a penalty pattern flag based on the lottery result, and executes a penalty processing mode according to the flag. The first mode of the penalty processing is as before, and as described above, the penalty processing is continued until the number of games set by the penalty counter is exhausted.

  Next, a second mode of penalty processing will be described. First, there is an irregular operation on the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c in the normal gaming state, and in the normal forward operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c (the left reel stop button is operated first), the left and right middle reels are operated. In the case where a small role that is difficult to establish the symbol arrangement corresponding to the winning combination is established by an irregular operation and the payout of the game medium is obtained across 301a to 301c, the effect control board 510 performs a penalty process. Judge as what to do. For example, as shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, even if the player presses the AT3 (scissors) that is a winning combination in order, the small combinations for the incorrect pressing order are often displayed. On the other hand, when AT3 is pinched (the left reel stop button 211a, the right reel stop button 211c, and the middle reel stop button 211b are operated in this order), the condition device of the small role 17 is given priority, and the player You can get paid out 9 game media. As a result, the player can acquire +8 medals unexpectedly by the irregular operation as compared with the case where the player does not. Therefore, the effect control board 510 determines the irregular operation for the plurality of reel stop buttons 211a to 211c as a penalty target.

  When the effect control board 510 draws the penalty processing mode and determines the winning of the second mode, the game control unit 510 does not dare to acquire game media that can be acquired by the player before the number of games set in the penalty counter. The penalty can be terminated. For example, if the player presses a plurality of reel stop buttons 211a to 211c in order from the left, the condition device for the winning combination is given priority, the symbol corresponding to the winning combination is established on the active line, In the case where the payout of the game medium can be received, the effect control board 510 navigates (teaches) the player in the push order other than the forward push, and the player operates the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c according to this navigation. However, if the condition arrangement of the winning combination is not given priority and the design sequence for the incorrect push order is established on the active line and the acquisition of a small number of game media is limited, the player dare to acquire the game media that can be originally acquired. Since it has been lost, the effect control board 510 executes a penalty process mitigation or mitigation process based on the unscheduled number of game media acquired and the number of game media lost.

  When the effect control board 510 determines the second mode in the penalty process, the value of the penalty counter is checked in the next game. Since the value of the penalty counter corresponds to the number of remaining continuous games of the penalty, the penalty process is continued until the value of the penalty counter becomes zero. When the value of the penalty counter is not zero, the effect control board 510 checks whether or not the winning combination has a condition device for a small combination that is prioritized by forward pressing. For example, AT1 and AT2 in FIG. 50 are winning combinations having a condition device of a small combination 17 that is prioritized by forward pressing. For the winning combination of AT1 and AT2, if the left reel stop button 211a is operated first, there is a payout of 9 medals. Most of them stay. When the effect control board 510 determines the winning combination, a navigation for prompting the first operation other than the left reel stop button 211a is displayed. At this time, the production control board 510 displays a message that recommends that the player follow the navigation, such as “Damage (penalty) recovery chance! If you follow the navigation, you can recover from the damage!” May be displayed. Of course, the player's operation according to this navigation is not subject to a penalty. In addition, when the irregular operation on the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is determined as a penalty, the effect control board 510 displays the screen of the liquid crystal display device in an image that seems to be damaged. Also good. At that time, every time the recovery chance is cleared, the production control board 510 changes the screen of the liquid crystal display device to display the process of recovering from the damage, and shows the damage recovery when the penalty is completely eliminated. A video may be displayed.

  When the winning combination is a conditional device that is prioritized except for forward pressing, the effect control board 510 performs a penalty process and proceeds to the next game. When the player operates the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c according to the navigation described above, the game medium that can be originally acquired is lost as long as the player performs a forward pressing operation. Each time the game medium is lost, the effect control board 510 subtracts a predetermined number of games from the penalty counter. When the value of the penalty counter becomes zero, the effect control board 510 ends the penalty process. In the game during the penalty period, the penalty process may be terminated when the accumulated value of the game media missed by the player reaches the number of game media obtained by the player unscheduled. When the effect control board 510 ends the penalty process, the effect control board 510 resets the flag for the second mode of the penalty process. According to the second aspect of the penalty processing, the player can dare to miss the game medium that can be originally obtained by the player during the penalty period. By ending, it was possible to avoid a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

  Next, a third mode of penalty processing will be described. When it is determined that the ART lottery that is an advantageous game is won, the effect control board 510 checks for the presence or absence of a flag corresponding to the third mode. When the effect control board 510 determines that the flag of the third mode is established, a penalty mask process for executing a penalty without causing the player to feel a penalty is executed. Penalty mask processing tries to use the reduced number of game media for the penalty by lowering the expected value of the game media in the advantageous game to which the third mode of penalty processing is applied from the original expected value. It is.

  Assume a winning combination including a plurality of condition devices (small roles) in which an operation mode other than the forward pressing operation of the plurality of reel stop buttons 211a to 211c and a display of a combination of symbols is given priority for different operations. . For example, in this winning combination, a small combination A (a condition device that is prioritized by the scissors pressing operation and the bells are aligned in the lower row) and a small combination B (corresponding to the small combination 17 in FIG. As a result, a duplicated condition device that has bells on the active line is established. When the combination of symbols corresponding to the small role A is complete, there are 5 medals paid out, and when the combination of symbols corresponding to the small role B is aligned, there are 9 payouts. The effect control board 510 determines the flag corresponding to the third mode of the penalty processing, and when determining the winning combination, it guides the payout of five medals by navigating with the scissors, and reversely presses it. By guiding the user, the payout of nine medals is guided. Compared to the reverse-push navigation, the scissor-push navigation has four fewer medals. When the third flag is not determined, the effect control board 510 almost always displays reverse navigation. Since the condition devices for these small roles A and B are not prioritized by the forward pressing operation in the normal gaming state, it is difficult to establish a combination of symbols corresponding to the small roles.

  When the production control board detects a flag corresponding to the third mode of the penalty processing, if the number of medals obtained unscheduled is, for example, eight, the above-mentioned description is made in the ART game until it becomes equal to the number of medals. When a winning combination is detected, a scissor-push navigation is displayed instead of a reverse-push navigation. If the player follows the scissors-pushing navigation, the number of medals of 4 medals is small, so by following the scissors-pushing navigation, the total deficit will be 8 and will be operated in a non-standard push order. This is the same as the extra number obtained. At this point, the effect control board 510 resets the flag and ends the penalty. If the total number of medals for the shortage in one advantageous game does not reach the total number of medals that were unscheduled, the production control board 510 does not reset the flag, You may make it carry over to ART. Also. If there are multiple irregular strikes that are subject to penalty, the total number of medals that are not scheduled is counted as a penalty. According to the third aspect of the penalty processing, the penalty is only digested by slightly reducing the number of paid-out medals within a period in which a large amount of medals can be expected in the advantageous gaming state (ART). The penalty can be terminated without making the player aware of the penalty or feeling the penalty.

[11-9. Special reel production]
Next, a reel special effect executed by the main board 409 will be described. The main board 409 executes a lottery for a specific reel special effect in the internal lottery process (S3) of the game process (FIG. 54). First, before explaining the specific reel special effect, the conventional reel special effect will be explained. As described above, the reel special effect means that the main board delays the timing when the operation of the left, middle and right reel stop buttons becomes effective after the start lever operation (after the game starts), that is, the reel stop button is enabled. This is a process in which the main board performs processing on at least one of the left, middle and right reels while delaying the lighting of the lamp.

  For example, the reel does not rotate when the start lever is turned on, the reel locks even when the start lever is turned on (the reel stops rotating slightly), the reel rotates backward while the start lever is turned on, the start lever is turned on However, only some of the reels rotate. When the period of the reel special effect elapses, the main board normally rotates the left and right middle reels to enable the operation of the left and right middle stop buttons. Reel special effects often occur for bonus game winning combinations obtained by internal lottery, but even if the winning role of small role (replay, bell, watermelon) or internal lottery is off Reel special effects may be performed. Although the winning role itself as a result of the internal lottery should be expected by the player, the player expects that the reel special effect will occur after the start lever operation, and if the reel special effect does not occur, the player will win There was a tendency to lower expectations for roles. This impairs the fun of the pachislot machine, that is, the function of expecting the winning role itself.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the main board performs the reel special effect using the period from the reel stop process (S5) to the start of the next game. This period has a strong aspect as a waiting period for the next game after the game is over, and has not been actively used to improve game play. The main board can perform a special reel effect until the start of the next game after the symbol combination for the winning combination is displayed after the reel is stopped. This reel special effect is sometimes referred to as a specific reel special effect in order to distinguish it from a conventional reel special effect performed after the game starts, and the latter is sometimes referred to as a conventional reel special effect. The main board can hold the timing for betting for the next game during the specific reel special effect so that the next game is not performed during the specific reel special effect.

  The main board can start a specific reel special effect triggered by the player's operation from the display of the symbol combination for the winning combination until the start of the next game. For example, an operation of a reel stop button, an operation of an effect button, or an operation of a start lever. After the main board displays the symbol combination for the winning combination, the reel special effect is executed before the next game is started, so that the player's expectation for the game can be achieved even after the winning combination is determined in the game. By suppressing the decrease, it is possible to have another expectation for the special reel special effect. After the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed, the main board may start the specific reel special effect when there is no operation by the player.

  The specific reel special effect is not a denial of the conventional reel special effect, and a specific reel special effect may be performed in a game in a plurality of games, and a conventional reel special effect may be performed in another game. Further, two reel special effects may be performed in the same game. In the special reel special effect according to the present invention, the main board displays a symbol combination for the winning combination to the player and a bonus game such as a payout of the winning combination, replay, regular bonus or big bonus, or an ART game. After the confirmation of the transition to the advantageous gaming state, etc. is presented to the player, a special benefit different from the special privilege given to the winning combination is given to the specific reel special effect. The additional bonus for the specific reel special effect is a bonus other than the bonus for the winning combination (a different privilege different from the bonus for the winning combination), for example, the number of additional games or additional sets of ART games performed by the effect control board 510 Or setting the number of released games of the ART game, reducing the number of released games, etc., as well as the normal probability of winning the specific game state (bonus game, ART game, etc.) on the main board 409 (From low probability) to high probability or ultra high probability state.

  The specific reel special performance is started for a specific winning combination, or may be started by lottery. The lottery means (main board) for the special reel special effect may perform the lottery even when the result of the internal lottery is off. The lottery means for the special reel special effect may increase the winning rate so that the specific winning combination becomes easier to win the specific reel special effect. After the symbol combination based on the winning combination is displayed on each reel, the specific reel special effect execution means stops a part of the plurality of reels in a stopped state after moving again, and stops the remaining reels. A movable stop control means is realized. The movable stop control means determines a reel special pattern that determines which reel is removable and how many symbols the removable reel is rotated and then stopped, or selects a reel special pattern from a plurality of patterns. . The movable stop control means is a special reel special effect until the next game is started after the symbol combination is displayed on the reel based on the winning combination by the combination lottery (until the next combination lottery is performed). Execute. After confirming the winning combination, the player can predict the additional bonus according to the form of the special reel special effect. The effect control board can receive an information command from the main board and derive an effect image and effect sound synchronized with the reel control in the specific reel special effect to the player.

  Next, the specific reel special effect will be described in detail. FIG. 74 is a timing chart of a conventional reel special effect, and FIG. 75 is a timing chart of a specific reel special effect of the present invention. In a conventional reel special effect, it is assumed that a winning combination A is won when the player operates the start lever. An effect for the winning combination A is started on the liquid crystal display device. Next, when the player performs the first reel stop operation, the second reel stop operation, and the third reel stop operation in order, and when the three reels stop, the player can receive the winning combination A as a privilege. A predetermined game medal is paid out. The player continues to have an expectation for the winning combination from the time when the start lever is operated until the payout of the bonus for the winning combination A. However, if the game medal is paid out, the player immediately expects the winning combination until an internal lottery of the next game is executed. When the next game is started (next start lever operation), the expectation for the winning combination starts again.

  When the main board determines that the internal winning combination B at the time of operating the start lever is triggered by the reel special effect, the timing for enabling the reel stop operation is delayed from the normal time, and during this time, the reel special effect is performed on the reel. The reel special effect is continued for a predetermined period by the main board. During this time, the stop operation for one or a plurality of reels becomes invalid. When the reel special effect is finished, the main board normally rotates the left, middle and right reels, cancels the reel stop operation invalidity, and accepts the reel stop operation. When a reel special effect is executed after the start lever is operated, a special reel processing such as the reel rotating backward or the reel locking occurs rather than expecting the symbol arrangement of the winning combination obtained as a result of the winning lottery. I expect more than the winning role, and even after the reel special performance ends, the expectation for the winning role remains low. In particular, if the reel special effect is a weak pattern, the expectation for the winning combination displayed after the reel special effect is significantly reduced.

  On the other hand, the special reel special effect (FIG. 75) of the present invention has an unexpected period from the stop of the third reel to the start of the next game (the bonus for the winning combination is paid out, and the player's expectation for the winning combination decreases). Is executed during the period. When the winning combination A is determined by the internal lottery, an effect for the winning combination A is executed on the liquid crystal display device, the first reel stop to the third reel stop are executed, and the bonus for the winning combination A is paid out. After that, a specific reel special effect is executed until the next winning lottery. During this time, the player continues to have expectations for the reel special effects, for example, without lowering the expectation for the game. Thereafter, even if the reel special effect is not performed at the timing of the next game, the player can have a sense of expectation for the winning combination B. In the process of repeatedly performing a plurality of games, the player can always hold a sense of expectation for the game.

  The main board executes the necessity process of the special reel special effect in the internal lottery process (S3). The main board checks the condition device as a result of the internal lottery to determine whether or not the specific combination is won. When a specific combination is won, a reel special determination flag is set in a reel special determination area of a predetermined area of the RAM 1114. The main board is determined in the display process (symbol combination mode) displayed on the active line and the internal lottery process (S3) when it is determined in the determination process (S6) that the reel has been stopped. The specific winning combination determination process is performed by collating with the permitted internal lottery result. The main control board sets a reel special execution flag when the winning combination is determined. The main control board checks the reel special determination flag and the reel special execution flag, and if both flags are set, confirms the operation of the third stop button or the stop of the third stop reel. The special reel special effect is started.

  The specific reel special effect is executed by removing (re-rotating) one or more of a plurality of stopped reels and then stopping the reel. In a state where the symbol is rotated and the movable reel is stopped, another privilege different from the privilege of the winning combination is given according to the symbol combination of the left, middle and right reels. Which reel is rotated and how much (reel special effect pattern) is selected by the main board according to the allocation table and set in a predetermined area of the RAM 1114 according to the winning combination when the reel special determination flag is set. The The determination of the reel special effect pattern may be performed at the stage of setting the reel special execution flag. In addition, the reel special effect may be executed even when the player cannot pull the corresponding symbol combination of the specific combination into the active line (that is, even when the reel special execution flag cannot be set).

  As a specific reel special effect processing mode, a series of operations in which some or all of the reels from the first reel to the third reel stop after restart and add another privilege may be repeated a plurality of times. . The main board may set information that repeats the reel special effect at the time of setting the reel special determination flag, or after the series of reel special effects from the restart of the reel to the stop, the continuous lottery is executed, When the continuous lottery is won, the next reel special effect may be performed based on the stop symbol.

  The main board checks the reel special effect pattern flag (the flag indicating which reel is rotated by how many symbols), and after the stop symbol by the internal lottery is displayed, the reel special effect is executed. FIG. 76 is a transition diagram of the symbol sequence of the reel band showing a specific example of the specific reel special effect. FIG. 76 shows stop symbols of a plurality of reel bands displayed on the symbol display window. The reel band design row according to FIG. 76 relates to a modified example different from the reel strip design row of FIG. 46, and 7 symbols of the same color are continuously attached to the left and right reel bands for two symbols. In the central reel band, 7 symbols of the same color are formed independently without being continuous. The 7 symbols of the left and right reels and the 7 symbols of the middle reel are combined, and 7 symbols can be established on one line, two lines, or both as a stop symbol of the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination. . FIG. 76 shows which reel is rotated from the stop symbol of the specific combination obtained as a result of the internal lottery. In the stop symbol of the stop pattern A, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is established along the effective line while seven symbols of the same color are arranged in two lines of the center line and the right-down line. As a privilege for the internal lottery, for example, a bonus of a big bonus is given by the 7 symbols of two lines. For example, a regular bonus privilege is given to the seven symbols arranged in one line as a privilege for the internal lottery.

  In the removable pattern 1 with the reel special effect based on the stop pattern of the stop pattern A, the main board rotates the left reel by a predetermined pattern after restarting (the middle reel and the right reel are kept stopped). Stop. In the removable pattern 2, the middle reel is stopped after being rotated by a predetermined symbol after restarting. In the removable pattern 3, the right reel is rotated by a predetermined amount after being rotated again and then stopped.

  In the removable pattern of the reels in the removable patterns 1 to 3, not all the reels of the stop symbol are rotated, but a part of the reels is rotated, so the main board is based on the winning combination to the player. The combination of symbols can be increased and displayed multiple times in one game. The player can expect to reproduce the stop pattern of the winning combination symbol through the reel special effect. In particular, since the reel of one symbol out of the symbols of the winning combination is rotated, the player has high expectation for the reproduction of the symbol corresponding to the winning combination. Note that when two or more symbol reels are removable, the degree of expectation for the reproduction of the winning combination symbol is lower than when one reel is removable. On the other hand, the removability of two or more reels is effective when the player is expected to have a symbol arrangement that can have a privilege higher than the privilege of the winning symbol of the winning combination. For example, this is a case where the winning symbol is a chance.

  In the removable patterns 1 and 3 in the stop pattern A, there are three types of stop patterns in which 7 symbols are aligned on one line, aligned on two lines, or not aligned in a specific reel special effect. On the other hand, in pattern 2, there are patterns in which 7 symbols are aligned in 2 lines or not. With the winning symbol stop symbol pattern A, the big bonus and the ART game after the completion of the big bonus are finalized as a bonus by the lottery. Depending on whether the 7 symbols are aligned in one line or in two lines by removability of the reel, a sub privilege (privilege given by the effect control board) is given as an additional privilege. The sub privilege is an addition of the number of continuing games of the ART game. The sub privilege may be an additional number of ART games.

  Stop symbol pattern B of the winning combination is established on one line with 7 symbols descending to the right. When the stop symbol pattern is B, the regular bonus as the winning combination and the ART game after the regular bonus is completed are determined. In the removable pattern 1, the left reel stops after re-rotation, in the re-movable pattern 2, the middle reel stops after re-rotation, and in the re-movable pattern 3, the right reel stops after re-rotation. In the removable pattern 1, there are patterns in which 7 symbols are aligned in 2 lines, aligned in 1 line, or not aligned, depending on the stop position of the left reel. In the removable pattern 2 and the removable pattern 3, there are patterns in which the 7 symbols are aligned or not aligned in one line depending on the stop position of the 7 symbols.

  When the symbol combination of the winning combination is the stop pattern C, seven symbols and one line are formed in the center. When the stop pattern of the symbol combination of the winning combination is C, the regular bonus as the winning combination and the ART game after the regular bonus is completed are determined. In the removable pattern 1, the left reel stops after re-rotation, in the re-movable pattern 2, the middle reel stops after re-rotation, and in the re-movable pattern 3, the right reel stops after re-rotation. In the removable pattern 1 and the removable pattern 3, there are patterns in which 7 symbols are aligned in two lines, aligned in one line, or not aligned, depending on the stop position of the left reel. In the removable pattern 2, there is a pattern in which the 7 symbols are aligned or not aligned in one line depending on the stop position of the 7 symbols.

  As described above, the combination of the stop symbol after the specific reel special effect differs depending on the combination of the stop symbol of the winning combination and which reel of the stop symbol is restarted. In the case where the winning symbol combination is stop pattern A, when the left reel or right reel is removable, there are cases where 7 symbols are formed on 1 line and 7 symbols are formed on 2 lines. When the middle reel is removable, there is only one case where two lines of 7 symbols are established. Therefore, when the left reel or the right reel is restarted, the player is given a sense of security in acquiring the additional privilege, whereas when the middle reel is restarted, the player feels a sense of confidence in acquiring the additional privilege. (Tension) is given. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of additional privilege when the middle reel is restarted and 7 symbols are established as compared with the degree of additional privilege when the left reel or the right reel is removable and 7 symbols are established. it can. That is, the combination of the specific symbols (7 symbols) displayed on the reels that are not removable among the combinations of the stopped symbols for the winning combination allows the main board to stop the plurality of reels during the reel special effect. The degree of the additional privilege based on the combination of can be taught.

  The main board allows the player to always visually recognize the specific symbols displayed on the non-removable reel, and allows the player to predict, expect, recognize, etc. the symbol arrangement after special reels relatively easily. It is possible to realize control that allows a player to clearly determine whether or not an additional privilege is given or to what extent. The main board teaches the player to give an additional privilege by a combination of stop symbols of a plurality of reels after the reel special effect. In addition, the main board can cause the player to expect a specific symbol arrangement in the reel special process that is greater than the specific symbol arrangement in the symbol combination based on the winning combination. In the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination, 7 symbols are formed by 1 line, but as a result of the reel special effect, 7 symbols are formed by 2 lines. In other words, a chance to recover for the winning combination as a result of the internal winning can be realized by the reel special effect. As described above, after displaying the symbol combination for the winning combination, the reel special effect based on the winning combination is executed, so that the combination of symbols is displayed multiple times based on the winning combination during one game. A bonus for the display of the first symbol combination consisting of displaying the symbol of the winning combination, and the subsequent bonus symbol for displaying the symbol combination after the first time based on the reel special effect By changing the value of the game, it is possible to give the player a sense of progress in the game.

  FIG. 77 is a lottery table of reel special effect patterns for the winning symbols. This table is recorded in the ROM of the main board. The main board refers to the lottery table corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the winning combination, and uses a random number to combine the restart reel and the number of games added from the lottery table. decide. In the lottery table (stop pattern A), when the left reel and the right reel are restarted, 7 symbols are formed by 1 line (single) or 2 lines (double) and an additional number of games is added (10 games). When the middle reel is restarted, there are cases where 7 symbols may not be aligned, but when 7 symbols are established, it is always established with 2 lines, so the maximum number of additional games It is shown that (50G) can be realized. Then, when the left reel or the right reel is restarted, the number of additional games is set such that, in the stopped symbols after restart, 7 symbols are established on 2 lines more than 7 symbols are established on 1 line. . Which reels are removable, how the specific symbols (7 symbols) are formed, and how many additional games are added (reel special effect pattern and additional benefits combination), the table distribution rate Determined by. As can be seen from the lottery table, which reel will be re-rotated, the allocation rate is set lower as the number of added games increases, so as a result, which reel is removable at the expected level of additional benefits. The game medal rate is almost the same.

  The lottery table 2 is a lottery table when the winning symbol combination of the winning combination is the pattern B. Since the stop pattern B is composed of 7 symbols in one line, compared to the lottery table 1 of the stop pattern A in which 7 symbols are formed in 2 lines, the distribution rate (probability) that the 7 symbols are not aligned after the reel restart. Is 50%, which is larger than the value of the lottery table 1 (10%). In addition, even if the middle reel is restarted, the number of games added to the middle reel is suppressed to a value smaller than that in the lottery table 1 (stop pattern A) because only one line of 7 symbols is established by the middle reel. Has been. When the left reel is restarted, there are cases where 7 symbols are formed by 2 lines, and the highest value of the number of upper games is set. The upper number of games of the entire lottery table based on the stop pattern B is limited to be lower than the upper number of games of the stop pattern A.

  The lottery table 3 is a lottery table when the combination of the stop symbols of the winning combination is the stop pattern C. Stop pattern C is the same as stop pattern B, but the 7 symbols remain in one line, but the stop pattern after restarting the right reel is one line in stop pattern B. Since the pattern C can have two lines, the advantage is that the stop pattern C is higher than the stop pattern B, and as a result of the special reel special effect, the probability that 7 symbols are not established is the direction of the stop pattern C Is set lower than that of the stop pattern B (50% for the stop pattern B, 40% for the stop pattern C). In the stop form after restarting the right reel and the stop form after restarting the left reel, the maximum number of additional games (30 games) is set when two lines of 7 symbols are established.

  As shown in the lottery table of FIG. 77, when the symbol combination stop pattern for the winning combination is A, B, and C, and when the arrangement of 7 symbols as the specific symbols is established by the stop after the reel restart, A stop pattern of any combination of the stop patterns A, B, and C is reproduced. In this case, the main board may continue the reel special effect process to realize a continuation unit that continues the reel special effect until the seven symbols are not aligned.

  According to the specific reel special effects described above, the following effects are achieved. The winning symbol (7 symbols established) stop symbol is displayed, and the expectation maintaining means that can maintain the expectation for the game is realized until the next game is started after the privilege for the winning symbol is confirmed. . The main board gives the player a sense of relief because the special effects are given to the player after confirming the bonus (advantage of the game medal payout or replay, big bonus, regular bonus, etc.) for the winning combination. A means of providing relief can be realized. Because the reels of some symbols in the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination are restarted, the combination of stop symbols that will be subject to additional bonus after reel special effects is predicted based on the display of the stop symbol that does not restart be able to. The teaching means for the additional privilege is realized by the stop pattern of the reel after the reel special effect. Since a combination of symbols after the reel special effect is generated based on the stop symbol corresponding to the winning combination, the expectation maintaining means for maintaining the expectation for the winning combination is realized even after presentation of the privilege for the winning combination to the player. In one game, the player is provided with the rotation and stop of the reel based on the winning combination, and the subsequent reel rotation and stop by a specific reel special effect and a plurality of reel operation modes. It is possible to improve the interest in the reel operation of the person.

  In the above-described embodiment, the main board has determined the reel to be moved / stopped during the special reel special effect processing, but the player can also select the reel to be restarted (movable selection means) ). When the main board wins a specific role as a result of the internal lottery process, a line of 7 symbols 1 line or 2 lines is displayed (the reel special effect is started by performing a lottery on whether or not to perform the reel special effect). You may win.) Set the reel special decision flag. When the symbol corresponding to the specific combination is displayed after the third reel is stopped, the main board notifies the player to select the reel to be moved / stopped via the liquid crystal display device using the effect control board. In response to this notification, the player selects a reel to be stopped after being re-movable by operating a stop button corresponding to the reel to be restarted. When the main board is operated by the stop button, the stop pattern of the movable reel corresponding to the stop button is determined by lottery.

  FIG. 78 shows a lottery table when the reels that are movable by the player are selected and the symbol pattern of the winning combination is A, B, or C. In the lottery table 1 (stop pattern A), as a result of the reel special effect, the middle reel has two patterns, that is, seven symbols are established in two lines or seven symbols are not established, and the seven symbols are not aligned. Although the probability is as high as 40%, an increase of 30 games or more is confirmed at 60%, and half of them are an increase of 50 games or more. Therefore, selecting the middle reel as a restart target is notified to the player via the liquid crystal display device by the effect control board that the gameability is “super turbulence”.

  When the player selects the left reel, the probability that 7 symbols after the reel special effect will not be established is 20%, and the maximum number of additional games (30 games) due to the fact that the 7 symbols after the reel special effect are established in 2 lines is 20%. ) Has a low probability of 10%, but the addition rate of 10 games or 20 games is 70% due to the establishment of 7 symbols in one line. Therefore, the selection of the left reel is announced to the player as “solid”. When the player selects the right reel, the probability that 7 symbols after the reel special effect will not be established is 30%, and the maximum number of games (30 games) due to the fact that the 7 symbols after the reel special effect are established in 2 lines is 30%. ) Is 20%, but the addition rate of 10 games or 20 games is 50% due to the establishment of one line of 7 symbols. The additional bonus for reel special effects by selecting the right reel has a slightly higher probability that 7 symbols will not be established than the additional bonus for reel special effects for the left reel, but the number of added games is set to a slightly larger value. Therefore, the reel special game based on the selection of the right reel is notified to the player as “ordinary” while the left reel is “solid”.

  The lottery table 2 is a distribution table when the stop pattern of the symbol combination of the specific combination of the internal lottery is B. As a result of reel special effects, there are two types of middle reels: 7 symbols are established in one line or 7 symbols are not established, and the probability that 7 symbols are not aligned is 30%, 70% 10 games will be added. Therefore, it is notified to the player that it is “solid” gameability to set the middle reel as a restart target. When the player selects the left reel, there is a 50% probability that the 7 symbols after the reel special effect will not be established, but the maximum number of additional games (30 Although the probability of (game) is as low as 10%, the addition rate of 10 games or 20 games is 60% due to the establishment of one line of 7 symbols. Therefore, the selection of the left reel is notified to the player as “disturbance” although it does not become “superdisturbance”. When the player selects the right reel, the probability that 7 symbols after the reel special effect will not be established is 40%, and the number of added games due to the establishment of 7 symbols after the reel special effect in one line is 20 games or The probability of 10 games is 60%. The added bonus by the reel special effect by selecting the right reel has a slightly higher probability that seven symbols will not be established, but the number of added games is set to be a slightly larger value than the additional privilege by the reel special effect of the middle reel. Therefore, the reel special game by the selection of the right reel is notified to the player as “ordinary” while the middle reel is “solid”.

  The lottery table 3 is a distribution table when the stop pattern of the symbol combination of the specific combination of the internal lottery result is C. As a result of reel special effects, there are two types of middle reels: 7 symbols are established in one line or 7 symbols are not established, and the probability that 7 symbols are not aligned is 20% and 80%. The addition of 10 games or 20 games is confirmed. Therefore, it is notified to the player that it is “solid” gameability to set the middle reel as a restart target. When the player selects the left reel, there is a 30% probability that the 7 symbols after the reel special effect will not be established, and the maximum number of additional games (30 games) due to the establishment of the 7 symbols after the reel special in 2 lines. Although the probability is as low as 10%, the addition rate of 10 games or 20 games is 60% due to the establishment of 7 symbols in one line. Therefore, the selection of the left reel is notified to the player as “normal” although it is not “solid”. When the player selects the right reel, the probability that the 7 symbols after the reel special effect will not be established is 40%, and the number of additional games is 30 games because the 7 symbols after the reel special effect is established on 2 lines. The probability is 20%, and the probability of adding 10 games or 20 games when 7 symbols are established in one line is 40%. The additional bonus for reel special effects by selecting the right reel is slightly higher than the additional bonus for reel special effects for the left reel, and the probability of the maximum number of additional games is set to a slightly higher value. ing. Therefore, the reel special game based on the selection of the right reel is notified to the player as “disturbance” while the left reel is “ordinary”.

  In this way, the combination of the specific symbols (7 symbols) displayed on the reels that are not restarted, depending on which reel the player selects and restarts for the symbol combination that stops the winning combination. Depending on the mode, the pattern combination form when the restarted reel stops, the distribution ratio of each of the plurality of stop patterns, and the combination form of the degree of additional privilege for each of the plurality of stop patterns are appropriately set Thus, the degree of expectation based on the distribution rate of the additional privilege, the level of the privilege, and the like corresponds to the appearance of the appearance of the stop symbol by the reel that is not movable. Therefore, it is possible to easily clarify the expected degree of the privilege to be granted due to the player selecting the reel. In addition, the level of additional bonuses is “(super) turbulent” games where the level of additional bonuses is high, but the probability of establishment of a game form for the generation of additional bonuses is low. “Normal” game where the probability of establishment of the game form for the benefit generation is normal, “stable” game that the probability of establishment of the game form for the generation of the additional benefit is high, although the degree of addition specific is low , By realizing the game personality setting means for additional benefits, it is possible to determine the game performance by the player's act of selecting a reel, it is possible to change the game performance at the player's will according to the progress of the game Become.

  In the above-described embodiment, the distribution table is recorded in the ROM of the main board, and the additional privilege of the reel special effect is determined by the main substrate, and the additional privilege is notified from the main substrate to the effect control board. The effect control board may receive an information command indicating a reel special effect pattern from the main board, and determine the degree of additional privilege based on a lottery table recorded in the ROM of the effect control board. When the additional privilege is determined by the reel special effect, the game with the additional privilege is executed in the game after the next game. When the additional privilege is the number of additional games of the ART game, after the next game in which the reel special effect is performed (after the bonus game based on the winning combination is finished), the effect control board adds the number of additional games. Start the game.

  As described above, the player can select any of the left, middle, and right reels in consideration of the stop symbols other than the reel to be selected, but by distributing the specific reel special performance pattern based on the lottery. (Refer to FIG. 78) The main board has a probability (additional bonus grant ratio) when the selected reel selected by the player stops at a specific symbol combination (established in one or two lines of seven symbols) after moving. Further, it is possible to change the degree of provision of the additional privilege that is given when the movable reel is stopped so as to form the specific symbol combination (specific reel special effect pattern changing means). Therefore, depending on which reel is selected at the time of the specific reel special effect, the degree of provision of the additional privilege varies, which may cause unfairness to the player. Therefore, when the main board or the effect control board is a specific reel special effect, a balancing means for balancing (equalizing) the advantage of the additional privilege regardless of which reel is selected is realized. This will be specifically described below.

A first form of distribution of the specific reel special effect pattern will be described. The specific symbol combination of the winning combination is the stop pattern A in FIG. 76 as in the first embodiment.
(1) Selection of left (right) reel (moving and stopping left (right) reel)
Probability that specific symbol combination is not established: 4/8 Additional benefits: 0G
Probability that a specific symbol combination will be established: 4/8
Probability of 1 line of 7 symbols: 2/8 Additional benefits: 30G
Probability of 2 lines of 7 symbols: 2/8 Additional benefits: 50G
(2) Selecting the middle reel (moving and stopping the middle reel)
Probability that specific symbol combination is not established: 6/8 Additional benefits: 0G
Probability that specific symbol combination will be established (2 symbols of 7 symbols will be established): 2/8 Additional benefits: 80G
When the left (right) reel is selected for the main board (production control board), the specific symbol combination is easily established, but the additional benefits are small, and when the middle reel is selected, the specific symbol combination is established. It is difficult to achieve a specific reel special effect that the additional benefits are large.

Expected additional benefits when the left (right) reel is selected,
(4/8) * 0G + (2/8) * 30G + (2/8) * 50G = 20G,
The expectation of additional benefits when the middle reel is selected is
(6/8) * 0G + (2/8) * 80G = 20G.

  In the first embodiment, the main board (production control board) is restarted to allow two kinds of symbol specific combinations (first symbol specific combination (one line of seven symbols) and second symbol specific combination (7). When a left reel (or right reel) that can display two lines of symbols) is selected, a decision is made to give an additional privilege with a probability of 50%, and one type of symbol is specified by restarting When a middle reel that can display a combination (only the second symbol specific combination (two lines of seven symbols)) is selected, a decision is made to give an additional privilege with a probability of 25%. That is, when a left reel (or right reel) that can display a plurality of symbol specific combinations belonging to a specific symbol combination among a plurality of reels is selected, any one of the plurality of symbol specific combinations is selected. The provision of the additional privilege is determined at a higher rate (probability) than when the middle reel that is a reel that can be displayed is selected. However, the additional benefit given when the second symbol specific combination is displayed by selecting the middle reel is an additional number of ART games of 80G, and the second symbol is selected by selecting the left reel (or right reel). The additional privilege given when the specific combination is displayed is an additional number of ART games of 50G. There is a possibility that privilege contents that are more advantageous to select a reel determined to be given an additional privilege at a low rate (probability) may be obtained. In other words, because the possibility of additional benefits is low, additional benefits for each reel so that the benefits are balanced by making the benefits of the additional benefits more advantageous when the additional benefits are granted. The balancing means is realized by setting the determination ratio and the distribution of privilege contents.

  As a result, when the middle reel is selected, the above-mentioned “(super) turbulence” game is temporarily realized as compared with the case where the left (right) reel is selected, but the degree of grant of the additional privilege is Expected values are the same. Therefore, although the player can select a different gameability according to the probability given by the selected reel and the content of the privilege when given, the fairness can be maintained in the selected gameplay. Furthermore, since the payout rate due to the additional privilege does not become unstable according to the reel selected by the player and becomes an approximately constant payout rate, sales management is facilitated not only on the player side but also on the hall side.

  Also, two types of symbol specific combinations (first symbol specific combination (1 line of 7 symbols) and second symbol specific combination (2 lines of 7 symbols)) can be displayed, or one type of symbol specific combination ( Whether only the second symbol specific combination (2 lines of 7 symbols) can be displayed can be displayed on the reels that are not selected and remain stopped by the transition diagram of the symbol sequence of the reel band such as FIG. Since a plurality of symbol specific combinations belonging to the specific symbol combination can be recalled, it can be suggested to the player in advance. That is, it is possible to clearly and simply guide the relevance to the privilege that can be given to the player by the choice of the reel based on the display symbol mode. In addition, the expectation degree of the additional privilege in the 1st form is twice the expectation degree of the additional benefit of the 1st form. Therefore, a high probability state and a low probability (normal probability) state are set for the distribution of the specific reel special pattern in the specific reel special effect process, and the main board (effect control board) has a high probability by lottery or according to the winning combination A state or a low probability state may be selected.

Since the present invention is intended to clarify the expectation degree of the additional privilege by giving the relationship between the specific symbol combination and the granting ratio and the granting degree of the additional privilege, the first form is preferable. The distribution processing form is not limited to this. For example, the second embodiment will be described. The stop symbol combination of the winning combination is the stop pattern A in FIG.
(1) Selection of left (right) reel (moving and stopping left (right) reel)
Probability that specific symbol combination is not established: 6/8 Additional benefits: 0G
Probability of a specific symbol combination: 2/8
Probability of 1 line of 7 symbols: 1/8 Additional benefits: 30G
Probability of 2 lines of 7 symbols: 1/8 Additional benefits: 50G
(2) Selecting the middle reel (moving and stopping the middle reel)
Probability that specific symbol combination is not established: 4/8 Additional benefits: 0G
Probability that specific symbol combination will be established (2 symbols of 7 symbols will be established): 4/8 Additional benefits: 20G

  When the left (right) reel is selected and the left (right) reel is moved / stopped by executing the specific reel special effect pattern distribution control of the second form, the main board (production control board) is 0 Is a special reel special effect that it is difficult to establish a specific symbol combination, but the added bonus is large, and if the middle reel is selected and the middle reel is moved or stopped, the specified symbol combination is easily established but the added bonus is low To realize.

Expected additional benefits when the left (right) reel is selected,
(6/8) * 0G + (1/8) * 30G + (1/8) * 50G = 10G,
The expectation of additional benefits when the middle reel is selected is
(4/8) * 0G + (4/8) * 20G = 10G.

  Even if a player chooses the left reel or right reel, which may have 7 symbols in one or two lines, and wants to get a solid extra benefit, or the middle reel with 7 symbols only in two lines Even if it is selected and an additional privilege is to be obtained at once, the expected value of the degree of provision of the additional privilege is the same. Therefore, the main board (production control board) executes means for balancing the degree of provision (advantage) of the additional privilege in the specific reel special production process regardless of which reel is selected.

Further, a third form of distribution of the specific reel special effect pattern will be described. The specific symbol combination of the winning combination is the stop pattern A in FIG. 76 as in the first and second embodiments.
(1) Selection of left (right) reel (moving and stopping left (right) reel)
Probability that specific symbol combination is not established: 4/8 Additional benefits: 0G
Probability that a specific symbol combination will be established: 4/8
Probability of 1 line of 7 symbols: 2/8 Additional benefits: 30G
Probability of 2 lines of 7 symbols: 2/8 Additional benefits: 50G
(2) Selecting the middle reel (moving and stopping the middle reel)
Probability that specific symbol combination is not established: 4/8 Additional benefits: 0G
Probability that specific symbol combination will be established (2 symbols for 7 symbols will be established): 4/8 Additional benefits: 40G

  Unlike the first and second forms, the third form has the same probability that a specific symbol combination for providing additional benefits will be available regardless of which of the left (right) reel and the middle reel is selected. is there. When the left (right) reel is selected, the specific symbol combination of the special reel special effect is 1 line of 7 symbols and 2 lines of 7 symbols, and the degree of additional privilege for each is different. However, when the left (right) reel is selected, and when the middle reel is selected, the expected value for granting the additional privilege is the same (10G). The main board (production control board) balances the advantage to which the additional privilege is given, regardless of which reel is selected, but when some reels are selected, depending on the state of establishment of the specific symbol combination Means for decentralizing (dispersing) the mode of providing the additional privilege is realized. Note that the probability of establishing a specific symbol combination of a specific reel special effect and the degree of provision of an additional privilege may be different between the selection of the left reel and the selection of the left reel. In addition, the player can freely select a reel that can be moved or stopped from among the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. However, the player can be notified of the reel that can be selected by the main board via the effect control board. You may do it. For example, “left reel or right reel can be selected”, “other than left reel can be selected”, “any two reels can be selected”, and the like. When the player selects a reel other than that notified, the player is asked to reselect the reel.

  In the above-described embodiment, it is first determined which reel is to be restarted as a reel special effect, and the number of additional games is determined depending on what form of stop symbol is obtained as a result of the reel restart. It was. On the other hand, when the main board determines the start of the reel special effect based on the winning combination, the degree of the additional privilege is determined by lottery, and the reel special effect pattern such as the reel that is removable in accordance with this is determined. Good. FIG. 79 is a distribution table for determining the degree of additional bonus for a specific reel special effect (for example, a distribution table for FIG. 76 stop pattern A. There may be a distribution table for each stop pattern). The main board draws the degree of granting the additional privilege from any of groups A, B, and C, and restarts the corresponding reel as defined in the distribution table to establish 7 symbols that are specific symbols. Let Group A consists of 50 games or 30 games, and the main board is formed with 2 lines in any case of 7 symbols. In the group B, the degree of additional privilege is composed of 10 games or 20 games, and 7 symbols are formed in one line in any case. In the group C, the degree of additional privilege is a zero game, and the main board moves the reel again without establishing 7 symbols.

  When the combination pattern corresponding to the winning combination is the pattern A, the additional privilege level is A group (1) of the allocation table (50 additional games, medium reel movable, 7 symbols 2 lines established), Group A (2) (30 additional games, left reel movable, 7 symbols 2 lines established), Group A (4) in the allocation table (30 additional games, right reel movable, 7 symbols 2 lines established), B group of the allocation table (5) (20 additional games, left reel movable, 7 symbols 1 line established), B group (6) of the allocation table (20 additional games, right reel movable, 7 symbols 1 line) Established), B group (7) of the allocation table (10 additional games, left reel movable, established with 7 symbols 1 line), B group (8) of allocation table (10 additional games, right game) Le movable, 7 satisfied in design single-line), C group (9) (plus game number 0 of the distribution table, the center reel movable, 7 symbols not satisfied) is drawing to either the reel special effect pattern. Based on the determined reel special performance pattern, the main board controls how the reels of the left reel, middle reel, and right reel are controlled in order to realize the degree of additional benefits by the reel special performance. It is determined whether it is established (whether 7 symbols are established by 2 lines or 1 line or 7 symbols are not established), and the reel is moved again and then stopped.

  When the combination pattern corresponding to the winning combination is the pattern B, the degree of additional privilege is the A group (2) of the allocation table (30 additional games, movable left reel, 7 symbols 2 lines established), the allocation table Group B (5) (20 additional games, left reel movable, established with 7 symbols 10 lines), Group B (6) in the allocation table (20 additional games, right reel movable, established with 7 symbols 1 line), B group (7) of the allocation table (10 additional games, left reel movable, 7 symbols 1 line), B group (8) of the allocation table (10 additional games, right reel movable, 7 symbols 1 line) Established), and the reel special effect pattern of group C (9) in the distribution table (the number of added games is 0, the middle reel is movable, and 7 symbols are not established).

  When the combination pattern corresponding to the winning combination is the pattern C, the additional privilege level is the A group (2) of the allocation table (30 additional games, left reel movable, 7 symbols 2 lines established), the allocation table Group A (4) (30 additional games, right reel movable, 7 symbols 2 lines established), B group (5) of allocation table (20 additional games, left reel movable, 7 symbols 1 line established), B group (7) of the allocation table (10 additional games, left reel movable, 7 symbols 1 line), B group (8) of the allocation table (10 additional games, right reel movable, 7 symbols 1 line) Established), and the reel special effect pattern of group C (9) in the distribution table (the number of added games is 0, the middle reel is movable, and 7 symbols are not established). In this way, the main board determines the reel special effect pattern based on the degree of addition of the additional privilege given to the additional game based on the reel special effect after the bonus level of the winning combination is determined at the time of the reel special effect. It may be.

  Next, another embodiment of the specific reel special effect process of the gaming machine will be described below while adding the above description in FIG. The main board 409 executes various control modes related to the specific reel special effect based on the program recorded in the ROM 1112. When the right reel, the middle reel, and the left reel rotate, the main board determines whether or not all the reels are stopped by the stop button. When all the reels are stopped, the main board determines whether or not the specific winning combination has been drawn. Here, the specific winning combination means, for example, the arrangement of “7” (specific symbol combination) as a specific symbol on one line or a plurality of lines, which is the target of the specific reel special effect described above, in the symbol display window 401. It is a winning combination that can align the symbols to be established on the active line. If the main board denies the lottery for the specified winning combination, it determines the lottery of the other winning combination and the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the other winning combination, processes the necessity of paying out game medals, and Transition to processing.

  Next, the main board determines whether or not a specific symbol combination is displayed in the symbol display window. If the determination is affirmative, a bonus such as a bonus game or an ART lottery is set, and whether or not a special reel special effect is necessary is determined. I do. Whether or not a specific reel special effect is necessary is determined by lottery as described above. If the main board makes a negative decision to execute the specific reel special effect, the main board proceeds to processing for the next game.

  On the other hand, if the main board affirms execution of the specific reel special effect, the BET for starting the next game after the current game is reserved until the specific reel special effect is completed, and among the stopped reels One or two of the reels are stopped after being removable (special reel special effect). The specific reel special effect patterns such as which reels are moved, which symbols are used to stop the moved reels, and how many times the reels are moved and stopped are recorded in the ROM 1112, and the main board has a plurality of patterns. A predetermined pattern is selected from the above, and the specific reel special effect process is continued.

  The main board collapses the specific symbol combination once established over the plurality of reels by moving some of the reels in the special reel special effect. The main board is a line in which at least one of the upper, middle, lower, diagonal right, and diagonal left is a line in which the symbol combination related to the specific symbol arrangement straddles multiple reels during the specific reel special effect duration If the related symbol combination is established linearly in these lines, it is recorded as an additional privilege grant target based on the specific reel special effect. Since the specific symbol combination is a sequence of symbols such as “7” that can be easily recognized by the player, the related symbol combination is set to be the same as or similar to the specific symbol combination.

  After confirming a specific symbol combination that can be easily recognized by the player himself / herself and having a high degree of advantage, the player can visually recognize the specific symbol combination so that some of the reels are rotated again and the specific symbol combination is destroyed. Based on the display of the specific symbol combination remaining in the stop symbol that does not rotate, it is possible to easily predict the combination of the stop symbols that are to be given the additional privilege. After that, when related symbols including the specific symbols that make up the specific symbol combination are related to the specific symbol combination to which the additional privilege is granted, when stopping across multiple reels, stop at a predetermined position connected by a straight line By making it possible, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that an additional privilege is given in the current game before the start of the next game.

  When the main board determines the end of the specific reel special effect, a predetermined additional privilege is determined based on the game results such as how many times the symbol combination related to the specific symbol arrangement is established during the specific reel special effect. As described above, the additional privilege includes an additional number of ART sets, an additional number of ART games, and the like, which are different from the privilege based on the winning combination. The main board sets an additional number of ART sets and an additional number of ART games on the effect control board. Next, the main board and the effect control board execute an advantageous game for a predetermined number of games based on the privilege accompanying the specific symbol arrangement and the additional privilege.

  On the other hand, if the main board has a specific winning combination, but the specific symbol combination cannot be drawn into multiple reels, a special reel special performance is made to allow the player to recognize the advantageous state associated with the establishment of the specific winning combination. The control process using is executed as follows. When determining that the specific symbol combination is not displayed, the main board determines whether or not the reel special effect is necessary, that is, whether or not some of the stopped reels need to be removable.

  A symbol combination displayed on a plurality of reels is not a specific symbol combination. For example, a specific symbol that can be easily recognized by a player (for example, “7” described above) is established on a line across a plurality of reels. This is the case when the symbol combination is not. If the specific symbol is displayed on one or two of the reels constituting the line, but the specific symbol is not displayed on another reel, the main board may be determined not to be the specific symbol combination. Note that symbol combinations that are not specific symbol combinations may be limited to predetermined ones. Whether or not a specific reel special effect is necessary is determined in advance by lottery.

  If the main board denies execution of the special reel special effect, the process proceeds to the next game. When the main board decides to execute the special reel special effect, a removable pattern for a plurality of reels is selected. There are a plurality of removable patterns, for example, a specific symbol combination formation pattern and a partial reel movable pattern.

  In the specific symbol formation pattern, the main board rotates at least one of the stopped reels, and the specific symbol combination is different from the specific symbol combination formed on the currently stopped reels. Force change. For example, when “7”, which is a specific symbol, is partially present on the same straight line of a plurality of reels, at least a reel that does not have a specific symbol may be rotated. Further, depending on the number of rotating reels, the size of the privilege given to the specific symbol combination corresponding to the specific winning combination may be suggested. As a result, in order to be able to realize gameability in which the behavior of the reel and the size of the privilege granted thereto are proportional or correlated with each other, the size and type of the privilege given by the reel behavior when the reel is re-rotated, etc. Can be estimated by the player, and the game can be more clearly defined.

  In the above description, some reels are removable. However, even if the specific symbol “7” is partially present on the same straight line of a plurality of reels, all the reels are intentionally rotated. Then, a pattern that is forcibly changed to a specific symbol combination may be provided. It is possible to give an apparent impact as an effect rather than rotating some of the reels, and to further emphasize that an additional privilege is given.

  When the main board displays the specific symbol combination, it grants a privilege related to the specific symbol combination corresponding to the specific winning combination, then determines whether or not the specific reel special effect is necessary, and the specific reel special effect process is described above. Run as follows. The main board has one or more reels even when the stopped state of the plurality of stopped reels is different from the specific symbol combination, even though the specific winning combination corresponding to the specific symbol combination is lottery. By moving and stopping to show a specific aspect to the player, the player knows that the specific winning combination was actually drawn without depending on the effect on the liquid crystal display device by the effect control board. The game can be continued while relieving that there is a possibility that a special reel special effect occurs based on the combination and an additional privilege can be obtained. Furthermore, in generating the above-described specific reel special effect, even if a different symbol combination is displayed, the specific reel special effect can be executed after the specific symbol combination is displayed by the control based on the specific symbol combination formation pattern. Thus, it is possible to clearly produce an effect using the stop mode to the player.

  In the part reel movable pattern, the main board rotates a part of the reel that has a symbol combination that is not a specific symbol combination, for example, a symbol that does not display the particular symbol, and this reel In the symbol display window 401 or a related symbol related thereto (a symbol combination that can be combined with a specific symbol to form a symbol combination corresponding to a predetermined winning combination, for example, a “7” symbol of different colors, or a BAR Stop to display symbols. As a result, the player can recall from the reel behavior itself without notifying the liquid crystal display device or voice that a specific winning combination capable of establishing a specific symbol combination has been drawn. .

  Even when it is necessary to operate the stop button at an appropriate timing (so-called “pressing”) as a condition for displaying a specific symbol combination, it can be controlled by a specific symbol combination formation pattern or control by a partly reel movable pattern. Even if a specific symbol combination cannot be displayed due to a lack of success, it is possible to improve the gameability according to the player's skill by executing a notice effect regarding the granting of the bonus privilege at the time of winning the specified winning role on the reel itself. There is no significant change, and it is possible to give a strong impression to the player that the fairness of the game is maintained. Furthermore, because the control by the part reel movable pattern is limited to reminding without winning the winning of the specific winning role, for example, the player stops at an appropriate timing when the specific symbol combination can be displayed. By not operating the buttons (not holding the button), the expectation that the player wins the specified winning role is maintained while the player's willingness to defer or confirm the winning of the specified winning role. Can continue to play.

  The main board performs a specific reel special effect process after performing a part reel movable pattern, stops a predetermined reel from moving, and displays a symbol combination related to the specific symbol combination to generate an additional privilege A reel special effect process may be executed. In this case, you may make it the expected value of the provision degree of an additional privilege lower than a specific symbol combination formation pattern. The above is another embodiment of the control process for a specific reel special effect.

  Next, in the specific reel special effect process, before informing the player of the reel that the main board is movable and stopped before moving the reel, and suggesting the player the degree of provision of the additional privilege based on the stopped reel, An embodiment will be described in which a player can be reminded of the degree of provision of an additional privilege. The main board performs a lottery to determine whether or not to perform advance notification processing of the movable reel when setting the specific reel special effect pattern. When the lottery process is not performed, the main board moves the specific reel according to the specific reel special effect pattern without performing the advance notification process of the movable reel.

  When the advance notice process lottery of the movable reel is won, the main board performs the advance notice process of the movable reel before the specific reel is moved, and moves the specific reel after the advance notice process is completed. In the form of the movable reel prior notification process, a plurality of patterns are set as a table in the ROM of the main board, and the main board performs a lottery drawing based on the table to determine the movable reel prior notification process pattern.

  As an example of the movable reel advance notification processing pattern, there is a form in which the movable reel advance notification processing is performed on the liquid crystal display device by the effect control board. The effect control board receives a specific reel special effect pattern command from the main board and analyzes the command to specify a movable reel. For example, the effect control board notifies the liquid crystal display of the movable reels such as “right reel movable”, “middle reel movable”, and “left reel movable”. Voice notification may be used. When there are a plurality of movable reels, the effect control board notifies the plurality of movable reels, such as “right reel / left reel movable”.

  Before the movable reel is moved, this reel is transmitted to the player in advance, so that the player can stop the non-notified reel (that is, the reel that cannot be moved) by stopping the notified reel. Because it is possible to know in advance, the reel can be moved in real life with the expectation of how much additional benefits will be given by reminding the stop mode displayed after the notified reel movement. Therefore, it is possible to enrich the interest for the specific reel special effect.

  The production control board receives a specific reel special production pattern command from the main board, and analyzes the command to identify a movable reel, but “left reel or middle reel movable”, “other than left reel movable”, “one” Or, the reel that is actually moved, such as “two reels movable”, “two reels movable”, etc., may be vaguely notified. By doing this, the player can make the reel that is actually moved ambiguous, and the game for the additional privilege can be changed as much as the degree of addition of the additional privilege may vary by reminding a plurality of patterns of the stop mode displayed after the movement. Will increase the expectation and “feeling of thrill”.

  The effect control board receives a specific reel special effect pattern command from the main board and analyzes the command to specify a movable reel, but may notify a reel other than the actually movable reel. For example, the left reel is actually moved, but false notification such as “middle reel movable” may be performed. Alternatively, it may be falsely notified that there is no movable reel, such as “no movable reel, sorry” even though there is a reel that is actually movable. By doing so, the player can have a greater sense of expectation with respect to the degree of additional privilege by having an unexpected feeling with respect to the actual movement of the reel after notification.

  The effect control board can also execute a pattern that causes the player to respond to the movable reel as the movable reel advance notification process. For example, there are pre-notification forms such as “Select one movable reel”, “Select two movable reels”, and “Which is the right reel, middle reel, or which is movable?”. The player responds to the prior notification by operating the stop button corresponding to the reel. When a movable reel is applied, the effect control board has an advantage such as increasing the degree of granting an additional privilege compared to when the movable reel cannot be applied, or continuing a specific reel special effect further. Processing can be executed.

  Instead of or together with the effect control board performing the movable reel advance notification process, the main board may perform the preliminary movement of the reel to notify the actually movable reel in advance. For example, a reel that is actually movable is reciprocated in a short cycle in the forward direction and the reverse direction. The player can recognize the reel that has undergone preliminary movement as a movable reel. In addition, the movable reel notified by the liquid crystal display device and the movable reel notified by the main board may be different from each other, so that the player can have a sense of expectation and tension as to which reel is actually movable. .

  The movement of the reel is relative, for example, in the case of a specific reel special effect, the plurality of reels are initially re-rotated, and the reels other than the reel selected by the main board are stopped before the selected reel. In the case of the specific effect pattern in which the last selected reel is stopped, the reel selected by the main board corresponds to the movable stop control target reel.

  Next, the game contents of the above-mentioned ART game will be specifically described. The outline is as follows. The game contents of the above-mentioned big bonus or regular bonus (game contents that display a combination of big bonus (BB) symbols and regular bonus (RB) symbols and acquire many game medals in a short time) Realized by. Therefore, although not described as a winning combination in FIG. 49, an ART bonus winning combination is set as a winning combination to shift to such an ART game (ART bonus game). This ART bonus winning combination can be established in either the normal gaming state or the ART game state. As an example, in the ART bonus game, it is assumed that the number of continuing games is set in advance according to the ART bonus winning combination, and when a plurality of types of ART bonus winning combinations are provided, the number varies depending on each ART bonus winning combination. The number of continuous games may be set. Then, when the ART bonus winning combination is won by a special lottery using the main board, and the symbol combination (ART bonus symbol combination) corresponding to the ART bonus winning combination is displayed when the reels are stopped, the ART bonus game is started. As an ART bonus symbol combination, for example, a combination of seven red symbols (such as being aligned on a straight line across each reel).

  The ART bonus game will be described. When the ART bonus game is started from the normal gaming state (ART bonus game state), in addition to the lottery of the winning role by the main board in each game for the number of continuing games of the ART bonus game, the effect control board wins the game. Based on the combination, a plurality of types of additional lottery related to the additional benefits different from the benefits of the winning combination are performed. In this additional lottery, for example, a lottery (first lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to the ART game after the ART bonus game and the number of continuing games in the ART game lottery in the first lottery are added ( There is a lottery (second lottery) for determining whether or not to add. The production control board first performs the first lottery in each game during the number of continuing games of the ART bonus game, and does not perform the first lottery in the game period after winning the first lottery. The lottery is performed. Therefore, when the first lottery is not won, when the ART bonus game for the number of continuous games is consumed, the ART bonus game state is returned to the normal gaming state. In addition, when the first lottery is won, after the ART bonus game for the number of continuing games has been consumed, the ART bonus game state is shifted to the ART game state, and when the second lottery is further won, The number of added games obtained in the second lottery is added to the prescribed number of games of the ART game in the ART game state.

  First, the effect control board performs a start effect for the ART bonus game based on the winning of the ART bonus winning combination. When the next game is started, the production control board performs the first lottery when the winning combination by the special lottery is a specific combination. The effect control board forms a lottery result storage area in the RAM corresponding to each game of the ART bonus game. The lottery result storage area includes a first flag area in which a first flag indicating a type of the lottery executed in the first lottery or the second lottery is stored, and a lottery result by the first lottery or the second lottery. A second flag area in which a second flag representing information related to the game (for example, the winning result, the number of added games, etc.) is stored; And a third flag area in which three flags are stored. The production control board sets the first lottery execution information in the first flag when the first lottery is performed, and sets the winning information in the second flag when the lottery is won. When the winning information is set in the second flag, the effect control board sets the suggestion effect execution information of the lottery result in the third flag. In addition, if the effect control board has performed the first lottery but has not won, the effect control board performs the necessity / unnecessary lottery of the suggestion effect. Set information.

  Here, an example of the suggestion effect of the lottery result will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining a simulated video of the front of the rotary handgun magazine, and the effect control board displays the simulated video as shown in FIG. 80 on the liquid crystal display device during the duration of the ART bonus. As shown in FIG. 80, the simulated video of the magazine includes seven display areas, and the numbers “1” to “6” are added. Each display area corresponds to one magazine. In the suggestion effect to be described later, display is performed in which one unlit display region is lit in numerical order. That is, in the simulated video of the magazine shown in FIG. 80, since the maximum number of additional magazines is 6, suggestive effects for lighting the magazine can be performed up to 6 times. For example, in the seventh suggestion effect, an effect such as lighting a central display area with a number “7” may be executed. Further, when turning on the magazine, the magazine may be turned on with different colors, and the degree of expectation for winning may be changed according to the color. Further, a lighting color corresponding to the winning combination at the time of performing the effect may be used, such as yellow for a bell, light blue for replay, and red for cherry. Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to displaying the simulated video of the magazine on the liquid crystal display device as shown in FIG. 80, for example, displaying a video that can be displayed in stages on the liquid crystal display device. Alternatively, the same mode of display may be performed by a combination provided in the gaming machine.

  As described above, when the suggestion effect execution information is set in the third flag, the effect control board displays an image (a suggestion effect) for adding a bullet to the magazine on the liquid crystal display device. When the suggestion effect execution information is not set in the third flag, the suggestion effect is not performed. Next, the production control board determines whether or not the current game is the final game of the ART bonus game, and in the case of the final game, performs the announcement production based on the suggestion selection and ends the ART bonus game. The content of the announcement effect will be described later. Regarding the specific combination at the time of the first lottery, a plurality of types may be set for the specific combination, and a table having different winning probabilities in the first lottery may be used for each specific combination. For example, the probability of winning the first lottery may be increased as the specific combination has a lower winning probability in the special lottery.

  On the other hand, if the current game is not the final game of the ART bonus game, the production control board shifts to the processing of the next game, and again if the first lottery is not won in the ART bonus game so far. When the first lottery process is performed and the first lottery is won, the above-described second lottery process is performed without performing the first lottery. In the second lottery, it is determined whether or not an additional privilege (addition of the number of continuous games) is given to the advantageous gaming state (ART game) in which the transition after the current ART bonus game is confirmed by the first lottery. When it is a lottery to be determined and the winning combination is a specified combination, the effect control board performs a second lottery. The effect control board refers to a predetermined distribution table related to the number of added games, and performs a lottery drawing for the number of added games. A plurality of types may be set for the specified combination that becomes the lottery trigger of the second lottery, and furthermore, a distribution table is provided in which the distribution mode of the number of added games differs according to the specified combination, for example, a rare combination The more the number of additional games may be distributed, the more the winning combination (the winning combination in the special lottery is lower). Note that when the second lottery is performed, the number of games that is always equal to or greater than the minimum number of games may be added, or the added number of games cannot be distributed (the number of added games of 0 games is selected). Cases may be included.

  When the production control board performs the second lottery, the second lottery execution information is set in the first flag, and if there is an allocation of the number of games added by the second lottery, the second flag is set. The winning information of the second lottery and the information on the number of added games are set. When the winning information of the second lottery is set in the second flag, the suggested effect execution information is set in the third flag and the above-described suggested effect is executed. If the execution information of the second lottery is set in the first flag, but the number of added games is not distributed in the second lottery and the winning information is not set in the second flag, execution of the suggestion effect is necessary. When the lottery is performed and the execution necessity lottery is won, the suggestion effect is executed by setting the suggestion effect execution information in the third flag.

  Next, the production control board determines whether or not the current game is the final game of the ART bonus, and in the case of the final game, the lottery result is announced based on the suggestion and the ART bonus game is ended. If it is not the final game, the production control board shifts to the process of the next game, and repeats the above-described second lottery process without performing the first lottery.

  In the suggestion effect, since the maximum number of bullets added in the rotary handgun magazine is 6, the suggestion effect after the seventh is not displayed, but the magazine at the stage where the first lottery is won in the seventh suggestion effect or later. The center area (area indicated by “7” in FIG. 80) is lit in highlighted color (red, rainbow, etc.) to indicate to the player that the first lottery has been won (confirmation of transition to ART game). You may make it do. Further, when the bullet is added to the magazine in the maximum and the first lottery is won, the central region of the magazine may be lit similarly.

  The effect control board is the final game of the ART bonus game and performs the notice effect of the aforementioned lottery result. The effect control board sequentially scans the lottery result storage area for each ART bonus game, and executes the notice effect when the suggestion effect execution information is set in the third flag. For example, in the display on the liquid crystal display device, the announcement directs a character whether or not a character can aim a rotating handgun at an obstacle (wall), fire bullets loaded in the magazine in order, and destroy the wall. Done by the statue. At this time, the production control board checks the first flag and the second flag, and if the winning flag relating to the first lottery is set, the moving image in which the wall is destroyed by the bullet and the ART game Displays the confirmation information of migration. On the other hand, when the winning flag is not set, a moving image in which the wall is not destroyed by the bullet is displayed.

  The effect control board asks the player to operate the effect button each time a display for firing bullets is executed in the notice effect. When the player operates the effect button in response to a request from the effect control board, a notification effect is executed each time. As a result of checking the first flag and the second flag by the effect control board, if the winning flag related to the second lottery is set, information on the number of added games is displayed in addition to the wall breaking moving image. When the winning information of the second lottery is not set in the second flag, the moving image of the wall is displayed. When the effect control board checks the sixth suggestion effect execution information, if there is the seventh or later suggestion effect execution information, this is checked at the same time, and the first flag of the second flag in the sixth and subsequent suggestion effect execution information is checked. The announcement effect is executed based on the lottery result information and the second lottery result information.

  According to this announcement, the player recognizes that the first lottery will be won by the first wall destruction and will shift to the ART game, and the second lottery will be won by the subsequent wall destruction. Thus, it is possible to recognize the number of games added to the ART game provided. In addition, as described above, during the ART bonus game period, the suggestion effect regarding the first lottery result or the second lottery result is performed, but the lottery result is kept secret until the notice effect is executed in principle. Is done. The effect of turning on the central area of the magazine (“7” in FIG. 80) and suggesting that the transition to the ART game is confirmed is an exceptional effect. Then, during the ART bonus game period until the announcement effect is executed, it is considered that the first lottery result is kept secret, and that the second lottery is performed when the first lottery is won. In this case, the player cannot know that the second lottery is being performed during the ART bonus game period. That is, during the ART bonus game period, the first lottery is controlled so that in principle the player does not know the lottery result, and the second lottery can be said further so that the player does not know the lottery result. For example, it is controlled to “proceed secretly” so that it is not known whether the lottery is being performed. Although the second lottery result can also be an object of suggestion according to the suggestion effect described above, the suggestion effect suggests the lottery result without distinguishing the type of the lottery (first lottery or second lottery). Therefore, it does not deny that the second lottery is controlled to “run in secret”.

  According to such a gaming machine of the present embodiment, until the ART bonus game is about to elapse (until the end of the ART bonus game), the result of the first lottery and the result of the second lottery are not notified to the player. Therefore, the player can continuously maintain the expectation for the advantageous game (ART game) during the bonus game. When the advantageous game is won by the first lottery, in the remaining ART bonus games, a lottery of additional benefits (the number of added games) for the advantageous game by the second lottery is performed, and the lottery result is notified. Therefore, the player can continue to have a sense of expectation that the benefits obtained even if the ART game is won't end, and that additional benefits can be expected until the end of the ART bonus game. And by suggestion production, it can continue to have a sense of relief that the lottery regarding the privilege is continuously performed during the period of the ART bonus game. That is, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, during the ART bonus game, there is no period in which the lottered winning combination is useless regarding the grant of the additional privilege, and the player's expectation for the grant of the additional privilege Can be sustained.

  In the above description, the first lottery and the second lottery are performed when the winning combination is a specific combination during the ART bonus game. However, a lottery may be performed every game. At this time, the probability of winning in the first lottery and the second lottery may be increased according to the rarity of the specific combination. In addition, if the second lottery is controlled so as to “secretly proceed”, the first lottery and the second lottery are performed at the same time, or the second lottery is performed in the game winning the first lottery. Or may be performed. Further, instead of the first lottery and the second lottery being performed during the ART bonus game period, the first lottery and the second lottery may be performed during the special period in the normal gaming state. For example, using a control table in which the probability of winning an ART game is set to a high probability for a certain number of games as a special period (the expectation of adding the number of games to the ART game may be set to a high probability) The first lottery and the second lottery are performed.

  Next, the above-described specific combination serving as a lottery opportunity for at least one of the first lottery and the second lottery will be described. Since there is no particular restriction on the symbol combination of a specific role, the symbol combination of one line is set as a specific role depending on the line on which the symbol combination is displayed while the symbol combination is the same symbol, It is possible not to set the symbol combination as a specific combination (set as a non-specific combination). For example, FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol combination (corresponding to a non-specific role) by a bell symbol, and shows a symbol combination of a bell symbol displayed in a diagonally downward right line from the left reel to the right reel. is there. The winning combination corresponding to the condition device capable of displaying the symbol combination shown in FIG. 81 can be a non-specific combination that is not a specific combination. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol combination (corresponding to a specific role) by a bell symbol. As shown in FIG. 82, a symbol combination in which the bell symbol is V-shaped over the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. The winning combination corresponding to the condition device capable of displaying the can be designated.

  Here, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a general privilege that is given according to the symbol combination stopped on the reel window based on the selected winning combination (for example, paying out a game medal or providing a replay state) Separately, it shall have a gaming state to which a “specific privilege” can be granted, and whether or not the specific privilege is granted, and the degree of the privilege to be granted is based on the lottery winning lottery Can be determined. The “specific privilege” is not particularly limited as long as it is a privilege different from the general privilege described above. For example, the transition to an advantageous game state such as an ART game or a special game, An increase in the number of games can be considered.

  Giving a “specific privilege” is explained using the above-mentioned specific role and non-specific role. The specific role is a highly expected role with a high expectation for the specific privilege grant, and the non-specific role is expected for the specific privilege It can be a low-expected role whose degree is lower than a high-expected role. At this time, when the specific combination is established and the bell V-shaped symbol combination is displayed, the specific privilege is more effective than the case where the non-specific combination is established and the bell right-down symbol combination is displayed. Expectation to be given is increased.

  However, even if a combination of symbols using the same bell symbol is divided into a specific combination and a non-specific combination based on the displayed line, the player cannot change the V symbol combination when all reels are stopped. It is easy to know whether it is displayed in a slanted line or a slanting line to the right, and in the latter case it can be detected that a non-specific role that is a low expectation role has been established, There is a problem of losing expectations. In view of this, the right reel is provided with a symbol arrangement that is common to both the V-shaped line and the diagonally downward sloping line and that can display both. Here, FIG. 83 is a diagram illustrating an example of a symbol combination including a common symbol array. As shown in FIG. 46, the arrangement number 16-18 of the third reel (right reel) has a symbol arrangement (common symbol arrangement) of “bell replay bell”. As shown in FIG. When these symbol arrangements are displayed on the upper, middle, and lower tiers of the reel, the bell symbol may have stopped at the lower tier of the right reel, but a condition device that displays the bell symbol in a V shape may be established. In other words, it is difficult for the player to recognize from the reel stop mode which condition combination of the symbol combination (downward-right line or V-shaped line) is established by the bell symbol. In other words, at this stage, the player determines whether the bell symbol combination of the V-shaped line that becomes the lottery trigger of the first lottery or the second lottery is established, or the bell symbol of the right-down line that does not become the lottery trigger Since it cannot be determined whether the combination has been established, it is impossible to detect which of the high expectation role or low expectation role is the winning combination, and the first lottery or the second lottery The expectation on the lottery result will not be reduced. When all the reels are stopped, the effect control board lights up the reel rear surface of each symbol of the symbol combination sequentially from the left reel to the right reel based on the established condition device. In the condition device for the V-shaped line of the bell symbol, the upper bell (first (left) reel), the middle bell (second (middle) reel), and the upper bell (third (right) reel) are lit in turn. In the condition device for the lower right line of the symbol, the upper bell (first (left) reel), the middle bell (second (middle) reel), and the lower bell (third (right) reel) are lit in order. Therefore, the player knows whether the symbol combination of the bell V-shaped line or the symbol combination of the bell-lowering line is established after the right reel stops at the common symbol arrangement. Can do. In other words, even if the right reel is established with the common symbol arrangement, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the lottery. The effect control board performs the above-described first lottery, second lottery, and suggestion effect processing based on the condition device corresponding to the symbol combination of the V-shaped line of the bell symbol.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 46, the common symbol array is adjacent to a large and conspicuous combination of “right” and “right” (sequence numbers 19-20). If the right reel is stopped using the symbol as a guide, the common symbol array can be pushed. On the other hand, when the common symbol arrangement is stopped on the reel window, it is not immediately known whether the symbol combination of the bell V-shaped line or the symbol combination of the bell lowering line is established. A player who wants to avoid this may use the “right” and “righteous” symbols as a guide and avoid the common symbol arrangement. In addition, even if the common symbol arrangement is displayed despite the fact that the common symbol arrangement is avoided, the symbol combination of the bell V-shaped line is established or the symbol of the bell right-down line is displayed. A player who does not intend to see if the combination has been established may immediately start processing for the next game (operation of the bet and start lever) and cancel the above-described lighting processing. As described above, in the lighting process, the reels are lit in order from the left reel, so even if the lighting process is started, if the lighting process is canceled at the stage before the lighting process is performed on all the reels. The player does not need to recognize the formation line of the bell symbol combination. Even if the lighting process is canceled from the beginning or on the way, the effect control board executes the suggested effect process described above.

  That is, if a stop operation that does not stop the common symbol arrangement at the reel window is a “predetermined operation”, such a predetermined operation is performed by the player at a timing at which the common symbol arrangement cannot be pulled into the right reel, for example. This is equivalent to pressing the stop button. In addition, when the stop button is pressed at a timing when the common symbol arrangement cannot be pulled in, the stop button is used when the player intentionally avoids the common symbol arrangement, for example, by using the “right” and “righteous” symbols as a guide. Is not only pressed, but also includes pressing when the player arbitrarily presses the stop button is when the common symbol arrangement cannot be pulled into the right reel by chance.

  Then, when the above-mentioned specific combination (V-shaped bell) or non-specific combination (lower right bell) is a winning combination, a “predetermined operation” is performed, and the reel stop control based on the operation is performed. The symbol combination is displayed on the reel window in such a manner that the player can recognize from the symbol combination whether the winning combination is a specific combination or a non-specific combination. Specifically, when the winning combination is a specified combination, a bell-shaped symbol combination with a bell is not displayed, but a V-shaped combination with a bell is displayed, and the winning combination is a non-specific combination. In this case, the V-shaped symbol combination by the bell is not displayed, but the symbol combination by the bell that is descending to the right is displayed.

  On the other hand, if a stop operation that stops the common symbol arrangement on the reel window is “an operation different from the predetermined operation” (hereinafter referred to as “specific operation”), such a specific operation is, for example, This corresponds to an operation in which the player presses the stop button at the timing when the common symbol arrangement is pulled into the right reel. The timing for pulling in the common symbol arrangement can be easily aimed for the player by using the “right” and “righteous” symbols as a guide as described above.

  Then, when the above-mentioned specific combination (V-shaped bell) or non-specific combination (downward bell) is a winning combination, a “specific operation” is performed, and the reel stop control based on the operation is performed. The symbol combination is displayed on the reel window in such a manner that the player cannot recognize from the symbol combination whether the winning combination is a specific combination or a non-specific combination. Specifically, regardless of whether the winning combination is a specific combination or a non-specific combination, the bells are lined down from the left reel to the middle reel, and the common symbol combination stops on the right reel. A character-shaped symbol combination (corresponding to a specific combination) and a right-downward symbol combination (corresponding to a non-specific combination) are displayed simultaneously.

  Note that the definition of “predetermined operation” or “specific operation” is not limited to the timing of pressing the stop button, and for example, a definition based on the pressing order of the stop button may be added. More specifically, if the above-mentioned “predetermined operation” includes a stop operation in a predetermined push order (for example, a forward push that first stops the left reel), the specific role is described above. Or, if the non-specific combination is a winning combination, if the player presses the stop button at a timing when the common symbol arrangement cannot be pulled into the right reel by forward pressing, whether the winning combination is a specific combination or a non-specific combination Can be displayed in the reel window in a manner that the player can recognize from the symbol combination. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned “specific operation” includes a stop operation based on a pressing order other than the predetermined pressing order (reverse pressing or middle pressing that does not stop the left reel in the first stop), Or, when the non-specific combination is a winning combination, if the player presses the stop button at the timing of pulling the common symbol arrangement to the right reel by reverse pressing or middle pressing, the winning combination is either the specific combination or the non-specific combination The symbol combination can be displayed on the reel window in such a manner that the player cannot recognize whether or not the symbol combination has occurred.

  According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the specific role or the non-specific role is a winning combination, when the above-mentioned “specific operation” is performed, the player is in the middle of the game. The winning role will not be detected. Specifically, a V-shaped symbol combination by a bell (corresponding to a specific combination) and a right-downward symbol combination (corresponding to a non-specific combination) are simultaneously displayed on the reel window by stopping the common symbol arrangement. As shown in FIG. 83, since each reel stops, the player is not informed from the stopped symbol combination whether the winning combination is a specific combination (high expectation combination) or a non-specific combination (low expectation combination). . On the contrary, when the specified combination or non-specific combination is a winning combination, if the above-mentioned “predetermined operation” is performed, a V-shaped symbol combination by a bell (see FIG. 82) or a right by a bell When the reel stops so that any of the symbol combinations that fall (see FIG. 81) is displayed in the reel window, the winning combination is either a specific combination (high expectation combination) or a non-specific combination (low expectation combination) The player can detect whether there is a symbol combination from the stopped symbol combination.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, whether or not to immediately detect whether the winning combination is a high expected role or a low expected role in accordance with either the “predetermined operation” or the “specific operation”. The game result can be displayed in a manner that meets the player's desire. If the “specific operation” is performed, the player cannot detect from the stopped symbol combination even if the low expectation role is established. In the middle of the game, if a player is informed that a winning role with low expectations is established, the player's expectation and interest can be overcome, and the game's interest can be sustained. It can be made.

  Next, the special winning combination of the ART bonus will be described. Although not illustrated in FIG. 49, as a special winning combination of ART bonus, a predetermined condition device capable of displaying a single symbol combination (in the middle row) of a specific symbol (7 symbols) at the time of correct pressing order is preferentially established. The first combination that preferentially establishes a condition device that displays a predetermined push order incorrect answer combination when the push order is incorrect and the double line symbol combination of the specific symbols (7 symbols) when the push order is correct. A second condition in which a predetermined condition device that can be displayed is preferentially established, and a condition device that displays a predetermined push order incorrect answer symbol combination when the push order is incorrect is preferentially established is the ROM of the main board. Defined in the control table.

  When either the first combination or the second combination is won by the special lottery, the production control board produces the production that teaches the symbol combination of the specific design and the pushing order of the reels, for example, “Aim at (Red) 7”. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device, and the selected ART bonus (red 7 assortment) and its stop procedure (right press, Teach the player to press (reverse). When the player stops the reels in the pushing order taught, the condition device capable of displaying the 7 symbol combinations is preferentially activated, and when the player operates the stop button of each reel at an appropriate timing, The main board stops each reel so that the symbol combination of 7 symbols is displayed on the middle line. Further, the main board freezes the process for starting the next game so as not to accept a bet for a certain period of time, and during this time, the production control board announces the ART bonus attribute information (ART bonus notification production). ). Here, the ART bonus attribute information is attribute information of the advantageous state, for example, the type of the selected advantageous state (ART bonus), the number of continued games in the advantageous state (ART bonus), or the advantageous state of the advantageous state Other information about the feature is included. More specifically, the type of ART bonus is whether it is an ART bonus of red 7 or white 7 and whether the 7 symbols are formed (single line) or 2 (double line). , Etc. are included. Note that the main board can execute the reel freeze effect in conjunction with the execution of the notification effect by the effect board.

  The effect control board determines the number of continuing games of the ART bonus according to the special winning combination. When the special winning combination is the second combination, the number of continued games of the ART bonus is larger than the number of continuing games when the special winning combination is the first combination. For example, in the case of seven single-line matches The number of continued games of ART bonus may be 50 games, and in the case of seven double lines, the number of continued games of ART bonus may be doubled to 100 games. If the reel stop button is not operated at an appropriate timing even though the correct answer is given in the order of pressing, the symbol combination of 7 symbols may not be displayed. However, in the above-mentioned freeze effect performed after all reels are stopped, the player is caused to re-rotate the reels and perform a process of re-stopping the reels at a position indicating the selected 7 assortments (single line or double line). It is possible to teach the attribute information of the ART bonus won.

  On the other hand, when the reels are stopped without following the pressing order, for example, the stop button for the left reel is operated first even though the pressing order for stopping the right reel first is the correct pressing order. In this case, priority is given to the condition device in which the combination of symbols for incorrect push order display is displayed, and the main board stops each reel without displaying the symbol combination of 7 symbols. After all reels stop, the main board starts the ART bonus from the next game, but does not perform the above-described freeze processing that is performed when the reels are stopped in the correct pushing order. The start effect of the ART bonus and the notification effect of the number of continuing games of the ART bonus are not performed. In other words, when the stop button for the left reel is operated, the suggested push order of correct answers is not followed, and the ART bonus notification effect (ART bonus start effect, ART bonus attribute information notification) is not required. , The main board does not perform the freezing process. As a result, the player can immediately start the ART bonus from the next game, instead of being notified of the ART bonus attribute information. When the middle reel is stopped for the first time, although it is incorrect in the pressing order, the stop button for the middle reel is adjacent to the stop button for the right reel. You may make it perform.

  As described above, after the special winning combination of the ART bonus is established, the production control board displays the selected ART bonus (for example, red 7 assortment) and its stop procedure (for example, the right push for first stopping the right reel). Teach the player, which teaches the player the proper operation recommended to start the ART bonus. When the player performs the reel stop operation according to this appropriate operation, the main board and the effect control board perform the ART bonus notification effect as described above. By performing such an ART bonus notification effect, the player can not only reliably recognize the acquisition of the ART bonus but also have attribute information (for example, the type of ART bonus and the number of continuous games) regarding the ART bonus. Since it is possible to know, it is possible to obtain a strong degree of satisfaction for acquiring an advantageous gaming state called an ART bonus.

  On the other hand, when the display that teaches the proper operation is performed, the effect control board provides an effect that teaches a push order different from the proper operation (for example, a forward push that stops the left reel first) as an alternative operation. It can also be displayed at the same time. Specifically, for example, in a region different from the region where the “left-pointing arrow” is displayed by the proper operation, a “right-pointing arrow” that reminds you of a forward press is displayed on the liquid crystal display while clearly indicating that the procedure is an alternative operation. Display on the device. When the player does not follow the display of the proper operation and first stops the left reel according to the display of the alternative operation, such an operation is performed by the above-mentioned “player who does not require the ART bonus notification effect”. Corresponds to the operation. That is, when the player performs the stop operation according to the alternative operation, the “ART bonus notification effect” executed when the appropriate operation is performed is not performed. You can cancel the period during which you will be able to proceed to the next game immediately. In order to distinguish the display of the substitute operation from the display of the proper operation, the proper operation can be performed such as being displayed smaller than the proper operation or being displayed in a color with a lower expectation than the display of the proper operation. It is desirable to allow the player to understand at a glance that this should be recommended over alternative operations.

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is informed from the player in advance that an ART bonus notification effect and a freeze process can be performed in the game by teaching an appropriate operation and an alternative operation. It is possible. Then, when an alternative operation is performed in a game where an ART bonus notification effect can be performed, the start of the notification effect itself is canceled, and when the freeze process such as reels and buttons is performed along with the notification effect, Execution of freeze processing can also be avoided. In other words, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has characteristics different from those of the gaming machine that can cancel the freeze process that is suddenly started, and the ART bonus notification effect and the freeze process that can be predicted to be executed. On the other hand, it is possible for the player to select whether or not to execute these notification effects and freeze processing, depending on whether an appropriate operation or an alternative operation is performed. According to such a gaming machine, for example, when the player wants to enjoy an effect related to the transition of the advantageous gaming state (that is, an ART bonus notification effect or a freeze effect), the effect is achieved by performing an appropriate operation. While being able to provide sufficient interest to the player, the player is in a gaming situation where there is little time left to play, or in a psychological situation where he wants to proceed to the next game promptly In some cases, by selecting an alternative operation, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance that can be felt when the notification effect is performed for a long period of time.

  Next, the case where the ART bonus winning combination is drawn in the ART game (chance RT1-chance RT3 state) will be described. The effect control board starts a special game state during the ART game based on the ART bonus winning combination. This special game state allows the number of continued games of the currently executed ART game to be added, and the production control board continues the special game state for a predetermined number of games, and during this time, according to the winning combination And add the number of games. The special game state is composed of a plurality of game periods, for example, a relatively long first game period (for example, about 10 games) and a short number of games (for example, one game) following the first game period. Is done. The effect control board executes a process that can give different additional benefits in the first game period and the second game period. For example, in the first game period, a process that can add an additional number of ART games is performed, and in the second game period, a process that can reinforce the total number of additional games in the first game period (for example, 2 Doubling).

  In the first game period, the effect control board determines the number of games to be added by a drawing lottery when the winning combination is a specific combination (for example, other than normal replay). During ART, because the probability of winning the role of Bell (AT1-AT10) in addition to the replay role is high, the player has an opportunity to concentrate and accelerate the number of games added to the ART game during the first game period. Can be given to a person. In the second game period, when a specific combination (for example, other than normal replay) is won, the number of additional games acquired in the first game period is doubled to further accelerate the number of additional games. The player can be given an opportunity to increase. Note that the processing when the specific combination is not won in the second game period is not particularly limited. For example, the number of additional games acquired in the first game period may be given. Or you may make it cancel provision of the number of additional games acquired in the 1st game period. Further, in this example, the specific combinations in the first game period and the second game period are all combinations other than the normal replay, but it is not necessary to set the same combination for these specific combinations.

  The production control board can perform a process of increasing the number of games added based on the winning combination, but whether or not the number of games is added is determined for each game in the first game period in the special gaming state, for example. Displayed to the player by winning or losing in the duel effect. If the addition of the number of games is affirmed, the player side character attacks the enemy side character and wins this, along with the added number of games is displayed, and the addition of the number of games is determined to be negative In the case (for example, the symbol combination of the middle stage replay), a video is displayed in which the player side character is attacked by the enemy character and lost to it. Such duel effects may be performed multiple times in the first game period, and when winning multiple times, the number of additional games acquired in the first game period is the total number of additional games acquired in each duel effect. It becomes. At the end of the first game period, for example, “final battle” is displayed to inform the player that it is the second game period, and the doubling of the number of added games based on the winning combination is affirmed. In the case of being played, an effect image for winning the player side character in the duel effect is displayed, and an added game number obtained by doubling the total number of added games acquired in the first game period is displayed.

  Next, the specific combination in the special game state will be further described. Although not described in the winning combination table (FIG. 50), a middle bonus (MB) can be added as a winning combination. This middle bonus means that the game state is changed to “middle bonus” by the main board until the cumulative number of game medals to be paid out reaches a specified number, for example, 14 after the game won the middle bonus. It is a winning role whose content is to be placed.

  Although the middle bonus is not shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, a condition device for a specific symbol combination for the middle bonus is defined. The specific symbol combination for the middle bonus is preferably a combination of a plurality of symbols that are not the same symbol. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from immediately knowing the winning of the middle bonus.

  In the “middle bonus” game, the production control board displays a specific symbol (JAC) indicating that the current game is a bonus game, and a symbol combination of a specific small role (for example, a bell symbol combination) when the reel is stopped. A condition device that can display is set. This condition device corresponds to an “all condition device for small roles” or “condition device for MB” described later. In the next game selected for the middle bonus, if there are more than the specified number of game media to be paid out (for example, 14), the middle bonus bonus game ends at that game and the game media is paid out to the specified number. If the number is less than the number (for example, 13), the remaining number of the specified number is one, so the next game is also controlled to be a bonus game during the middle bonus. When a game medal is paid out (for example, 14) in the game, the state of “middle bonus” is terminated in the game.

  In a game in which the middle bonus is won and the game state is “middle bonus”, the main board draws the presence of replay (normal replay). If the replay is not won, all the small role condition devices (all Condition device for small roles) (for example, small item 1-small item 26 in FIG. 50), when the replay is won, the condition device for MBs in which the pressing order is defined in addition to the conditional devices for all small roles Is also established. The condition device for MB is set in preference to the condition devices for all small combinations as long as the correct answer is given in the order of pressing the reel stop button.

  In a game in which the replay is not won during the middle bonus, the MB condition device is not established, and therefore the condition device that is irrelevant in the push order among all the condition devices (for example, the accessory 17 in FIG. 50). Middle priority is given in this game by giving priority to a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game medals by displaying a specific symbol (for example, a set of bells) corresponding to the conditional device after the reel is stopped. Can be terminated.

  On the other hand, in the game won for replay during the middle bonus, the MB condition device is given priority as long as the correct answer is given to the push order of the reel stop button by the guidance (teaching) of the push order by the production control board. A state in which the next game is also in the middle bonus by displaying a specific symbol corresponding to the device (for example, a set of bells) so that the number of game medals slightly less than the specified number (for example, 13) is paid out. Can be continued. On the other hand, if the answer is not correct in the order of pressing, all the small role condition devices are given priority over the MB condition device, and the predetermined number of game medals are paid out, thereby completing the middle bonus in the current game.

  Note that in the second game in the middle bonus, the remaining payout number that is allowed to continue the bonus game is one, and the bonus game ends in that game regardless of whether or not the replay is won. In consideration of this, even if the replay is won, all the small combination condition devices may be set with priority. At this time, the player can always acquire 14 pieces in the second bonus game in the middle bonus. In addition, in this example, it is described that the bell alignment is displayed as a symbol combination by a specific symbol, regardless of which of the MB condition device or all small role condition devices is preferentially set. The symbol combinations of the specific symbols are not limited to the same. For example, even if the bells are the same, the formation mode is changed, such as changing the straight line or dividing it into a straight type and a V-shaped type. You may do it.

  Here, the case where such a middle bonus is a specific combination and the specific combination is established in the special game state will be described in detail. As described above, the special gaming state includes the first game period and the second game period, and when the specific role is won in the first game period, the number of additional games in the ART game is determined by the distribution lottery. When a specific combination is won in the second game period, the number of added games (total) acquired in the first game period is doubled and given.

  First, consider a case where a middle bonus is won in the first game period. After winning the middle bonus, the game shifts to at least one bonus game. In this example, when a symbol combination based on a specific symbol corresponding to the MB condition device is displayed in the first game, the game shifts to a bonus game of a maximum of two games. Therefore, when the middle bonus is won during the first game period, first, the first ART game is added and the number of games is sorted and selected by the middle bonus, and then the MB condition device or When all the small-combination condition devices are established and a symbol combination (for example, a bell set) based on a specific symbol is displayed, a second or third ART game additional game number distribution lottery is performed. In other words, by winning the middle bonus once, there will be at least 2 chances to win additional games, up to a maximum of 3 in this example, and the player will be given many times. It can be expected to gain an additional number of ART games.

  In the state where the gaming state is the chance RT as in this example, since the winning probability of replay is set high, when the middle bonus is won, the bonus game in the middle bonus is highly rewarded. You can expect. If the replay is won with a high probability, the MB condition device is preferentially established for the first game in the middle bonus, so the second bonus game is finalized, resulting in a total of two games. Symbol combinations (bell alignment) with specific symbols are displayed over the bonus game. Therefore, when the middle bonus is won in the first game period, the player can expect an increase in the number of ART games over the subsequent two games with high probability.

  Next, a case where a middle bonus is won during the first game period and the bonus game extends over the second game period will be described. For example, when the first game period is 10 games, the middle bonus is won in the final game (10th game) of the first game period. At this time, since the 10th game won in the middle bonus is the final game of the first game period, a lottery for the number of additional games is performed, and the player can expect to acquire the number of additional games. Furthermore, the next game is shifted to the bonus game, but since the 11th game is in the second game period, the bonus combination acquired in the first game period is displayed by displaying a combination of symbols with specific symbols. Double the number of games (total) is confirmed. That is, when the player wins the middle bonus at the 10th game, the player can expect not only the acquisition of the additional game number but also the success of doubling the additional game number before playing the 11th game. it can.

  Also, even if the middle bonus is won one game before the final game of the first game period (that is, the ninth game), there is a possibility that the bonus game with the middle bonus may extend to two games. In some cases, it can be expected that the number of added games will be doubled by displaying the combination of symbols by specific symbols. Specifically, if the game state is such that the replay probability is increased as described above, there is a high possibility that the MB condition device is preferentially set in the first game (tenth game) of the bonus game, In that case, it can be expected that the bonus game will continue until the second game (the eleventh game). At this time, not only is a lottery for the number of games to be added according to the establishment of the middle bonus in the ninth game and the “first bonus game” in the tenth game, but also in the eleventh game. With the “second bonus game”, the number of added games is successfully doubled. Therefore, even when the middle bonus is won one game before the final game of the first game period, the player can expect not only to acquire an additional number of games but also a game that has not yet been played (11th game) You can expect the success of doubling the number of games in the game.

  In the special gaming state described above, it has been described that the effect control board displays a specific symbol (JAC) in the “middle bonus” game (JAC game), but in addition to this, during the JAC game Since it is determined that the specific symbols are aligned, a predetermined effect or suggestion indicating a high degree of expectation may be performed regarding the provision of a special privilege in the first or second game period. Such an effect or suggestion display corresponds to a pre-reading effect relating to the provision of a special privilege. By performing such a pre-reading effect, it is possible to make the player have expectations for the result of the lottery of the next game and the provision of special benefits from the stage before the lottery of the next game is performed. Can be increased.

  According to the gaming machine of the present embodiment described above, when a middle bonus is won, the winning combination to be drawn in the bonus game is limited, and a symbol combination based on a specific design is based on the winning of the lottery. Since it is determined that the information is displayed, there is a great expectation for obtaining a special privilege (for example, adding the number of ART games in the first game period or doubling the number of additional games in the second game period). it can. In conventional gaming machines, it is generally impossible to know the lottery result before the lottery, so there are not a few cases where the player has a feeling of frustration considering the fact that he could not win a specific winning role. However, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the middle bonus is won as described above, it is possible to be confident and expect a great deal for the next game and thereafter. As a result, the gaming machine of the present embodiment can provide a game while maintaining the interest of the player.

  The above is one form of the slot machine 1 of the present invention, but is not limited to this. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine other than a slot machine, such as a pachinko machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Slot machine 10 Clearance 21 Transparent plate 50 Model unit 90 Front opening / closing member 100 Outer main body 100a Rotating shaft 101 Bottom plate 102 Side plate 102a Convex portion 102b Guard portion 103 Top plate 104a Heat radiation port 104b Cord outlet 105 Partition plate 106 Projection step 107 Installation Piece 108 mounting piece 109 opening 110 medal discharge device 110a device main body 110b hopper 110c discharge port 110d overflow bowl 110e payout sensor 111 auxiliary medal storage box 111a medal full sensor 112 power supply device 112a device case 112b top plate 112c rear plate 112d front plate 112e Side plate 112f Slope plate 112g Vent hole 112h Leg portion 112i Vent space 112j Stepped portion 112k Mounting piece 112m Protruding portion 112m-1 Protruding portion 112p Through hole 112r Bottom plate 112s Plate 112t Setting key switch 112u Reset switch 112v Power switch 113 Wiring relay member 114 Boss hole 115 Rail member 116 Rail member 117 Stopper 118 Mounting tool 119 Main body side wiring 120 Mounting plate 121 Cover body 122 Connector board 123 Connector board 124 Connector 125 Connector 126 Opening 127 Opening 128 Supporting tube 129 Wiring duct 131 External relay terminal plate 132 Through hole 133 Vent hole 200 Door-shaped front member 200a Through hole 201 Medal tray 202 Operation part 203 Medal slot 205 Single slot button 206 MAX button 207 Medal selector 207a Solenoid 207b Insertion sensor 208 Medal return button 209 Storage release switch 210 Start lever 211a Left reel stop button 211b Middle reel Stop button 211c Right reel stop button 212 Medal basket 213 Return basket 214 Transparent window 214a Transparent plate 214b Edge member 214c Through hole 214d Through hole 215 Locking device 215a Base member 215b Support piece 216 Forehead frame 217 Light emitting unit 217a Light emitter 217a-1 Light source 217a-2 Light guide plate 217b Reflective member 218 Fixing member 219 Concave groove 300 Pattern change display device 301a Left reel 301b Middle reel 301c Right reel 302 Device case 303 Driving means 304 Bottom plate 305 Top plate portion 305 Top plate portion 306 Right plate 307 Left side Plate 308 Rear plate 309 Upper swash plate 310 Lower swash plate 311 Handle 312 Reel board 313 Cable 315 Detachment portion 316 Handles 321a to 321c Reel band 331a Left reel position sensor 331b Middle reel position sensor 331c Right reel position sensor 341a Left reel drive motor 341b Middle reel drive motor 341c Right reel drive motor 400 Case member 401 Pattern display window 402 Reinforcement bar 402a Guide part 403 Bottom plate 404 Side plate 405 Rear plate 406 Top plate 407 Reinforcement member 408 Wiring work space 409 Main board 410 Boss 411 Wiring window 412 Concave step portion 413 Tapered portion 414 Wheel 415 鍔 Hook portion 417 Triangular space 418 Temporary fastening member shelf 420 Hinge bracket 420a Fixing member 420b Rotating member 420c Short link 420d Long link 420e Fixed piece 420f Bearing Piece 420g overlapping region 420h overlapping region 420h overlapping region 420j pin hole 420k pin 421 lock piece 422 handle port 423 case side wiring 424 harness 425 connector 426 harness 427 connection Kuta 427a Free hole 427b Ear piece 427c Screw 428 Connector holder 429 Holder main body 429a Receptacle 430 Through hole 431 Attachment piece 432 Button-shaped panel fastener 433 Bench part 434 Bench side plate 435 Nail piece 436 Finger hook part 437 Cable groove 438 Wiring port 440 Guide rail 442 Locking hole 443 Skylight portion 444 Reinforcement band 449 Main substrate 500 Image display body 500s Dashed area 501 Frame member (display panel)
502 Illuminating device 503 Substrate 505 Translucent cover plate 506 Tube frame 507 Translucent cover 508 Receiving unit 509 Engaging unit 510 Production control substrate 512 Speaker 600 Upper rail 601 Fixing member 602 Tool 603 Screw 604 Error lamp 606 Replay lamp 608 Start Ramp 610 Ramp 614 Ramp 623a Right-down line 523b Right-up line 700 Connection 701 Fixed sheath member 701a Prevention piece 702 Rod 702a Shaft hole 702b Hooking wall 703 Stopping shaft 703a Spring 704 Stopper 705 Groove 706 Picking piece 1110 CPU
1112 ROM
1114 RAM,
1116 I / O interface 1130 I / O interface 1200 Hall computer

Claims (1)

  1. A plurality of movable bodies with a plurality of symbols,
    Starting operation means capable of rotating the plurality of movable bodies;
    Based on the operation of the start operation means, lottery means for performing a lottery for the winning combination;
    A gaming state control means for controlling to any gaming state including at least a normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state;
    A transition determination means for performing a determination to shift to the advantageous gaming state at a different rate according to the type of the winning combination lottered by the lottery means during a predetermined game period that is shifted when a predetermined condition is established;
    A gaming machine equipped with
    The gaming state control means includes
    Even when it is determined that the transition determination means shifts to the advantageous gaming state during the predetermined gaming period, the advantageous gaming state is controlled after the predetermined gaming period ends,
    A transition notification effect executing means for performing a transition notification effect capable of notifying the player whether the transition determination means shifts to the advantageous gaming state when the predetermined game period ends;
    A specific combination instruction capable of displaying specific information indicating that the specific winning combination is drawn based on the fact that at least the specific winning combination is selected during the predetermined game period by the lottery means. Means, and
    The specific role teaching means is:
    From the time when the specific information is displayed until the end of the predetermined game period, an additional effect that can increase the specific information based on the fact that the specific winning combination has been drawn is executed,
    The transition notification effect executing means is
    If the specific information is increased by the increase effect until the predetermined game period is over, the transition notification effect for the number of times including the increased specific information can be executed, and the increased specific information If the player is informed that the transition to the advantageous gaming state is made based on the result of the transition notification effect before the transition notification effects for the number of times including information are executed, the advantageous gaming state to be transferred The game machine is characterized in that an additional privilege effect that can give an additional privilege is executed for the number of times corresponding to the remaining specific information .
JP2013188894A 2013-09-11 2013-09-11 Game machine Active JP6432927B2 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2013188894A JP6432927B2 (en) 2013-09-11 2013-09-11 Game machine

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2013188894A JP6432927B2 (en) 2013-09-11 2013-09-11 Game machine

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
JP2015054075A JP2015054075A (en) 2015-03-23
JP6432927B2 true JP6432927B2 (en) 2018-12-05

Family

ID=52818892

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
JP2013188894A Active JP6432927B2 (en) 2013-09-11 2013-09-11 Game machine

Country Status (1)

Country Link
JP (1) JP6432927B2 (en)

Families Citing this family (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP6504503B2 (en) * 2015-08-12 2019-04-24 株式会社ユニバーサルエンターテインメント Gaming machine
JP6248078B2 (en) * 2015-08-28 2017-12-13 京楽産業.株式会社 Game machine
JP6518599B2 (en) * 2016-01-19 2019-05-22 株式会社ユニバーサルエンターテインメント Gaming machine

Family Cites Families (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP4089869B2 (en) * 2001-12-12 2008-05-28 ダイコク電機株式会社 Slot machine
JP2004154488A (en) * 2002-11-08 2004-06-03 Aruze Corp Game machine
JP2005065863A (en) * 2003-08-21 2005-03-17 Olympia:Kk Game machine, game machine program and computer readable recording medium recorded with game machine program
JP5336208B2 (en) * 2009-01-21 2013-11-06 ダイコク電機株式会社 Slot machine
JP5540181B2 (en) * 2009-09-10 2014-07-02 株式会社オリンピア Game machine
JP5256471B2 (en) * 2009-10-15 2013-08-07 株式会社大都技研 Amusement stand
JP5500551B2 (en) * 2010-10-14 2014-05-21 サミー株式会社 Slot machine
JP5833372B2 (en) * 2011-08-09 2015-12-16 株式会社三共 Slot machine
JP5985171B2 (en) * 2011-10-28 2016-09-06 株式会社三共 Slot machine

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2015054075A (en) 2015-03-23

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6138097B2 (en) Game machine
JP5879597B2 (en) Game machine
JP2015047283A (en) Game machine
JP5371027B2 (en) Game machine
JP6010526B2 (en) Game machine
JP5604759B1 (en) Game machine
JP2015029535A (en) Game machine
JP6241910B2 (en) Game machine
JP6057177B2 (en) Game machine
JP2014198194A (en) Game machine
JP5144120B2 (en) Game machine
JP6296695B2 (en) Game machine
JP6296704B2 (en) Game machine
JP2016198351A (en) Game machine
JP6494964B2 (en) Game machine
JP5371029B2 (en) Game machine
JP6296703B2 (en) Game machine
JP2008307114A (en) Game machine
JP6296702B2 (en) Game machine
JP5954837B2 (en) Game machine
JP2009240438A (en) Game machine
JP2015085019A (en) Game machine
JP5891495B2 (en) Game machine
JP5802933B2 (en) Game machine
JP5802934B2 (en) Game machine

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
A621 Written request for application examination

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A621

Effective date: 20160912

RD04 Notification of resignation of power of attorney

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A7424

Effective date: 20170419

A977 Report on retrieval

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A971007

Effective date: 20170724

A131 Notification of reasons for refusal

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A131

Effective date: 20170824

A521 Written amendment

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A523

Effective date: 20171017

A521 Written amendment

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A523

Effective date: 20171018

A131 Notification of reasons for refusal

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A131

Effective date: 20180328

A521 Written amendment

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A523

Effective date: 20180517

TRDD Decision of grant or rejection written
A01 Written decision to grant a patent or to grant a registration (utility model)

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A01

Effective date: 20181031

A61 First payment of annual fees (during grant procedure)

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A61

Effective date: 20181031

R150 Certificate of patent or registration of utility model

Ref document number: 6432927

Country of ref document: JP

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: R150